Automatic date update in version.in
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976@kindex -Ur
977@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 978@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
979For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 981turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
982@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986@samp{-r} for the others.
987
577a0623
AM
988@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996in a linker script.
a854a4a7 997
252b5132
RH
998@kindex -v
999@kindex -V
1000@kindex --version
1001@cindex version
1002@item -v
1003@itemx --version
1004@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1005Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1006lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008@kindex -x
1009@kindex --discard-all
1010@cindex deleting local symbols
1011@item -x
1012@itemx --discard-all
1013Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015@kindex -X
1016@kindex --discard-locals
1017@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -X
252b5132 1019@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1020Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1023
1024@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026@cindex symbol tracing
1027@item -y @var{symbol}
1028@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036@kindex -Y @var{path}
1037@item -Y @var{path}
1038Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1043The recognized keywords are:
1044@table @samp
1045
1046@item combreloc
1047Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048lookup caching possible.
1049
1050@item defs
560e09e9 1051Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1052shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1053
6aa29e7b
JJ
1054@item execstack
1055Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
b039ef04
L
1057@item global
1058This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@item initfirst
1063This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068objects.
1069
1070@item interpose
1071Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072but the primary executable.
1073
5fa222e4
AM
1074@item lazy
1075When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078Lazy binding is the default.
1079
cd6d6c15
NC
1080@item loadfltr
1081Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082runtime.
1083
1084@item muldefs
1085Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087@item nocombreloc
1088Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090@item nocopyreloc
1091Disables production of copy relocs.
1092
1093@item nodefaultlib
1094Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1095ignore any default library search paths.
1096
1097@item nodelete
1098Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1099
1100@item nodlopen
1101Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1102
1103@item nodump
1104Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1105
6aa29e7b
JJ
1106@item noexecstack
1107Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1108
8dfef1bd
L
1109@item text
1110Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1111
1112@item notext
1113Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1114
1115@item textoff
1116Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1117
6aa29e7b
JJ
1118@item norelro
1119Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1120
cd6d6c15
NC
1121@item now
1122When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1123dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1124when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1125deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1126first called.
1127
1128@item origin
1129Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1130
6aa29e7b
JJ
1131@item relro
1132Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1133
24718e3b
L
1134@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1135Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1136
1137@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1138Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1139
04c3a755
NS
1140@item stack-size=@var{value}
1141Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1142Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1143@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1144
d258b828
IZ
1145@item bndplt
1146Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1147
cd6d6c15
NC
1148@end table
1149
ece2d90e 1150Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1151
1152@kindex -(
1153@cindex groups of archives
1154@item -( @var{archives} -)
1155@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1156The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1157either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1158
1159The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1160references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1161the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1162archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1163object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1164would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1165they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1166resolved.
1167
1168Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1169it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1170more archives.
1171
69da35b5
NC
1172@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1173@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1174@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1175@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1176Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1177recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1178and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1179the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1180behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1181so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1182restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1183
4a43e768
AM
1184@kindex --as-needed
1185@kindex --no-as-needed
1186@item --as-needed
1187@itemx --no-as-needed
1188This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1189on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1190the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1191on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1192needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1193emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1194non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1195the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1196non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1197Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1198the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1199needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1200from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1201
e56f61be
L
1202@kindex --add-needed
1203@kindex --no-add-needed
1204@item --add-needed
1205@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1206These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1207their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1208options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1209and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1210
252b5132
RH
1211@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1212@item -assert @var{keyword}
1213This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1214
1215@kindex -Bdynamic
1216@kindex -dy
1217@kindex -call_shared
1218@item -Bdynamic
1219@itemx -dy
1220@itemx -call_shared
1221Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1222for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1223default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1224for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1225multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1226@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1227
a1ab1d2a
UD
1228@kindex -Bgroup
1229@item -Bgroup
1230Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1231section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1232object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1233@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1234only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1235
252b5132
RH
1236@kindex -Bstatic
1237@kindex -dn
1238@kindex -non_shared
1239@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1240@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1241@itemx -dn
1242@itemx -non_shared
1243@itemx -static
1244Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1245platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1246variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1247may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1248library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1249option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1250option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1251shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1252references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1253libraries.
252b5132
RH
1254
1255@kindex -Bsymbolic
1256@item -Bsymbolic
1257When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1258definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1259for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1260within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1261platforms which support shared libraries.
1262
40b36307
L
1263@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1264@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1265When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1266symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1267This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1268libraries.
1269
55255dae
L
1270@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1271@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1272Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1273typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1274global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1275within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1276to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1277in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1278which support shared libraries.
1279
1280The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1281scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1282
40b36307
L
1283@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1284@item --dynamic-list-data
1285Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1286
1287@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1288@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1289Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1290is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1291
0b8a70d9
L
1292@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1293@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1294Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1295
252b5132
RH
1296@kindex --check-sections
1297@kindex --no-check-sections
1298@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1299@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1300Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1301been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1302perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1303suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1304allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1305restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1306Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1307force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1308option.
252b5132 1309
ddbb8a31
NC
1310@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1311@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1312@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1313@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1314This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1315by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1316command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1317output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1318input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1319specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1320follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1321behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1322
1323This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1324libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1325mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1326their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1327required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1328the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1329dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1330symbols.
1331
252b5132
RH
1332@cindex cross reference table
1333@kindex --cref
1334@item --cref
1335Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1336generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1337Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1338
1339The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1340easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1341sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1342symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1343definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1344where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1345symbol are listed.
252b5132 1346
4818e05f
AM
1347@cindex common allocation
1348@kindex --no-define-common
1349@item --no-define-common
1350This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1351The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1352@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1353
1354The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1355the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1356of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1357forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1358Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1359from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1360This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1361and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1362duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1363paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1364
252b5132 1365@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1366@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1367@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1368Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1369address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1370times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1371limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1372context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1373symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1374constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1375using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1376@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1377equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1378
1379@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1380@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1381@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1382@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1383@itemx --no-demangle
1384These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1385and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1386present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1387underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1388mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1389different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1390to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1391demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1392is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1393
1394@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1395@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1396@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1397@item -I@var{file}
1398@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1399Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1400generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1401linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1402doing.
1403
7ce691ae 1404@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1405@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1406@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1407@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1408Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1409with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1410
252b5132
RH
1411@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1412@item --force-exe-suffix
1413Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1414
1415If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1416@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1417the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1418option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1419Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1420it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1421
1422@kindex --gc-sections
1423@kindex --no-gc-sections
1424@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1425@item --gc-sections
1426@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1427Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1428targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1429performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1430@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1431
d5465ba2
AM
1432@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1433examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1434symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1435command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1436referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1437libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1438referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1439the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1440relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1441
ac69cbc6 1442This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1443@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1444specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1445a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1446
c17d87de
NC
1447@kindex --print-gc-sections
1448@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1449@cindex garbage collection
1450@item --print-gc-sections
1451@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1452List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1453printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1454collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1455default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1456be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1457line.
1458
30824704
RM
1459@kindex --print-output-format
1460@cindex output format
1461@item --print-output-format
1462Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1463other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1464in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1465
252b5132
RH
1466@cindex help
1467@cindex usage
1468@kindex --help
1469@item --help
1470Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1471
ea20a7da
CC
1472@kindex --target-help
1473@item --target-help
1474Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1475
2509a395
SL
1476@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1477@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1478Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1479@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1480
1481@cindex memory usage
1482@kindex --no-keep-memory
1483@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1484@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1485symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1486instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1487necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1488while linking a large executable.
1489
1490@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1491@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1492@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1493@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1494Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1495is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1496The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1497behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1498libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1499
aa713662
L
1500@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1501@kindex -z muldefs
1502@item --allow-multiple-definition
1503@itemx -z muldefs
1504Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1505report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1506first definition will be used.
1507
b79e8c78 1508@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1509@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1510@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1511@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1512Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1513This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1514determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1515shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1516how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1517
903249d7
NC
1518The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1519referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1520an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1521a shared library.
1522
1523The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1524libraries specified at link time are that:
1525
1526@itemize @bullet
1527@item
1528A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1529that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1530resolvable at load time.
1531@item
1532There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1533symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1534
1535The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1536select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1537architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1538appropriate memset function.
1539@end itemize
b79e8c78 1540
31941635
L
1541@kindex --no-undefined-version
1542@item --no-undefined-version
1543Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1544it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1545will be issued instead.
1546
3e3b46e5
PB
1547@kindex --default-symver
1548@item --default-symver
1549Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1550exported symbols.
1551
1552@kindex --default-imported-symver
1553@item --default-imported-symver
1554Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1555imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1556
252b5132
RH
1557@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1558@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1559Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1560files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1561been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1562This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1563errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1564have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1565inappropriate.
1566
fe7929ce
AM
1567@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1568@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1569Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1570library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1571
252b5132
RH
1572@kindex --no-whole-archive
1573@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1574Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1575archive files.
1576
1577@cindex output file after errors
1578@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1579@item --noinhibit-exec
1580Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1581Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1582errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1583when it issues any error whatsoever.
1584
0a9c1c8e
CD
1585@kindex -nostdlib
1586@item -nostdlib
1587Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1588command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1589(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1590
252b5132 1591@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1592@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1593@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1594@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1595file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1596@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1597object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1598object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1599should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1600usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1601name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1602list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1603command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1604this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1605@end ifclear
1606
36af4a4e
JJ
1607@kindex -pie
1608@kindex --pic-executable
1609@item -pie
1610@itemx --pic-executable
1611@cindex position independent executables
1612Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1613ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1614libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1615address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1616normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1617defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1618
252b5132
RH
1619@kindex -qmagic
1620@item -qmagic
1621This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1622
1623@kindex -Qy
1624@item -Qy
1625This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1626
1627@kindex --relax
1628@cindex synthesizing linker
1629@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1630@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1631@item --relax
28d5f677 1632@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1633An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1634@ifset GENERIC
1635This option is only supported on a few targets.
1636@end ifset
1637@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1638@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1639@end ifset
1640@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1641@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1642@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1643@ifset XTENSA
1644@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1645@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1646@ifset M68HC11
1647@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1648@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1649@ifset NIOSII
1650@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1651@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1652@ifset POWERPC
1653@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1654@end ifset
252b5132 1655
28d5f677
NC
1656On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1657global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1658addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1659synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1660instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1661
1662On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1663debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1664@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1665This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1666family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1667@end ifset
1668
1669@ifset GENERIC
1670On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1671but ignored.
1672@end ifset
1673
28d5f677
NC
1674On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1675@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1676
252b5132
RH
1677@cindex retaining specified symbols
1678@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1679@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1680@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1681@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1682Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1683discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1684symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1685@ifset GENERIC
1686(such as VxWorks)
1687@end ifset
1688where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1689run-time memory.
1690
1691@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1692or symbols needed for relocations.
1693
1694You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1695line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1696
1697@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1698@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1699@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1700@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1701Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1702linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1703arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1704them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1705also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1706objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1707@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1708ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1709@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1710
ff5dcc92 1711The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1712SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1713@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1714runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1715options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1716gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1717file systems.
252b5132 1718
ff5dcc92 1719For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1720followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1721the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1722@end ifset
1723
1724@ifset GENERIC
1725@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1726@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1727@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1728When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1729happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1730of the input files.
1731
1732When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1733non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1734shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1735explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1736specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1737@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1738either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1739appearing multiple times.
1740
28c309a2
NC
1741This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1742that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1743is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1744runtime linker would do.
1745
252b5132 1746The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1747libraries:
252b5132
RH
1748@enumerate
1749@item
ff5dcc92 1750Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1751@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1752Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1753between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1754specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1755used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1756at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1757by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1758the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1759@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1760On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1761@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1762environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1763@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1764On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1765directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1766@item
a1b8d843 1767For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1768variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1769@item
ec4eb78a
L
1770For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1771@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1772libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1773@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1774@item
252b5132
RH
1775The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1776@item
1777For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1778exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1779@end enumerate
1780
1781If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1782warning and continue with the link.
1783@end ifset
1784
1785@kindex -shared
1786@kindex -Bshareable
1787@item -shared
1788@itemx -Bshareable
1789@cindex shared libraries
1790Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1791and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1792shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1793undefined symbols in the link.
1794
252b5132 1795@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1796@item --sort-common
1797@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1798@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1799This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1800ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1801sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1802eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1803between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1804specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1805
2509a395
SL
1806@kindex --sort-section=name
1807@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1808This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1809patterns in the linker script.
1810
2509a395
SL
1811@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1812@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1813This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1814patterns in the linker script.
1815
252b5132 1816@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1817@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1818Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1819each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1820size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1821
1822@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1823@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1824Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1825output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1826This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1827certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1828cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1829that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1830support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1831input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1832more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1833many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1834
1835@kindex --stats
1836@item --stats
1837Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1838as execution time and memory usage.
1839
2509a395 1840@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1841@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1842Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1843configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1844that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1845
252b5132
RH
1846@kindex --traditional-format
1847@cindex traditional format
1848@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1849For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1850the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1851use the traditional format instead.
1852
1853@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1854For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1855symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1856full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1857@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1858trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1859combine duplicate entries.
1860
2509a395
SL
1861@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1862@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1863Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1864address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1865times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1866line.
1867@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1868for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1869@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1870should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1871sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1872
2509a395
SL
1873@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1874@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1875@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1876@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1877@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1878@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1879@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1880Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1881@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1882
2509a395
SL
1883@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1884@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1885@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1886When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1887byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1888
9d5777a3
RM
1889@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1890@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1891@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1892When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1893the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1894text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1895
0d705e9f
AM
1896@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1897@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1898@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1899When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1900model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1901
560e09e9
NC
1902@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1903@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1904Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1905values for @samp{method}:
1906
1907@table @samp
1908@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1909Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1910
1911@item report-all
da8bce14 1912Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1913
1914@item ignore-in-object-files
1915Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1916ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1917
1918@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1919Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1920ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1921when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1922libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1923command line.
1924@end table
1925
1926The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1927by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1928
1929Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1930unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1931can change this to a warning.
1932
1715a13c
L
1933@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1934@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1935@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1936@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1937Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1938supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1939the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1940argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1941
1942@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1943@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1944@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1945Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1946used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1947about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1948is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1949see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1950use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1951symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1952@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1953
7ce691ae 1954@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1955@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1956@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1957@item --warn-common
1958Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1959a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1960but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1961you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1962Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1963warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1964
1965There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1966
1967@table @samp
1968@item int i = 1;
1969A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1970file.
1971
1972@item extern int i;
1973An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1974There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1975variable somewhere.
1976
1977@item int i;
1978A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1979variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1980The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1981single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1982size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1983a definition of the same variable.
1984@end table
1985
1986The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1987Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1988just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1989encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1990a common symbol.
1991
1992@enumerate
1993@item
1994Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1995definition for the symbol.
1996@smallexample
1997@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1998 overridden by definition
1999@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2000@end smallexample
2001
2002@item
2003Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2004the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2005except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2006@smallexample
2007@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2008 overriding common
2009@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2010@end smallexample
2011
2012@item
2013Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2014@smallexample
2015@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2016 of `@var{symbol}'
2017@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2018@end smallexample
2019
2020@item
2021Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2022@smallexample
2023@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2024 overridden by larger common
2025@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2026@end smallexample
2027
2028@item
2029Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2030the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2031encountered in a different order.
2032@smallexample
2033@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2034 overriding smaller common
2035@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2036@end smallexample
2037@end enumerate
2038
2039@kindex --warn-constructors
2040@item --warn-constructors
2041Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2042object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2043detect the use of global constructors.
2044
2045@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2046@item --warn-multiple-gp
2047Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2048This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2049Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2050section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2051of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2052base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2053base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2054bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2055large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2056values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2057option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2058
2059@kindex --warn-once
2060@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2061@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2062@item --warn-once
2063Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2064which refers to it.
2065
2066@kindex --warn-section-align
2067@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2068@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2069@item --warn-section-align
2070Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2071alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2072The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2073is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2074the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2075
8fdd7217
NC
2076@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2077@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2078Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2079
a0c402a5
L
2080@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2081@item --warn-alternate-em
2082Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2083
560e09e9
NC
2084@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2085@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2086If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2087@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2088This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2089
2090@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2091@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2092This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2093it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2094
252b5132
RH
2095@kindex --whole-archive
2096@cindex including an entire archive
2097@item --whole-archive
2098For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2099@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2100in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2101files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2102library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2103library. This option may be used more than once.
2104
7ec229ce 2105Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2106about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2107Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2108list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2109your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2110
2509a395
SL
2111@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2112@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2113Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2114@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2115undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2116@var{symbol}.
2117
2118This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2119wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2120wishes to call the system function, it should call
2121@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2122
2123Here is a trivial example:
2124
2125@smallexample
2126void *
cc2f008e 2127__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2128@{
cc2f008e 2129 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2130 return __real_malloc (c);
2131@}
2132@end smallexample
2133
ff5dcc92 2134If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2135all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2136instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2137call the real @code{malloc} function.
2138
2139You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2140links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2141you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2142file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2143call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2144
6aa29e7b
JJ
2145@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2146@item --eh-frame-hdr
2147Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2148@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2149
e41b3a13
JJ
2150@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2151@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2152Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2153generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2154if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2155
6c1439be
L
2156@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2157@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2158@item --enable-new-dtags
2159@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2160This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2161systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2162@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2163and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2164If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2165created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2166those options are only available for ELF systems.
2167
2d643429 2168@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2169@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2170Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2171close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2172time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2173increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2174value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2175
fdc90cb4
JJ
2176@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2177@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2178Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2179@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2180new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2181the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2182hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2183
35835446
JR
2184@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2185@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2186This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2187linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2188for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2189about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2190
4f9c04f7 2191Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21921021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2193run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2194has been used.
2195
2196The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2197enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2198
c0065db7
RM
2199@kindex --build-id
2200@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2201@item --build-id
2202@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2203Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2204or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2205unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2206@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2207@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2208@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2209the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2210string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2211@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2212is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2213
2214The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2215that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2216unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2217to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2218file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2219string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2220
2221Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2222@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2223@end table
2224
0285c67d
NC
2225@c man end
2226
36f63dca 2227@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2228
0285c67d
NC
2229@c man begin OPTIONS
2230
ff5dcc92 2231The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2232the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2233normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2234use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2235@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2236like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2237symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2238object file).
2239
2240In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2241support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2242PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2243values by either a space or an equals sign.
2244
ff5dcc92 2245@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2246
2247@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2248@item --add-stdcall-alias
2249If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2250as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2251[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2252
2253@kindex --base-file
2254@item --base-file @var{file}
2255Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2256addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2257@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2258[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2259
2260@kindex --dll
2261@item --dll
2262Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2263@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2264file.
bb10df36 2265[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2266
88183869
DK
2267@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2268@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2269@item --enable-long-section-names
2270@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2271The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2272the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2273for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2274fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2275to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2276allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2277disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2278generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2279as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2280with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2281GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2282information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2283option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2284section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2285when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2286image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2287[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2288
252b5132
RH
2289@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2290@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2291@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2292@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2293If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2294do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2295only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2296resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2297undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2298@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2299to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2300warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2301import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2302to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2303feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2304@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2305mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2306[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2307
522f09cd
KT
2308@kindex --leading-underscore
2309@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2310@item --leading-underscore
2311@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2312For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2313in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2314disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2315
252b5132
RH
2316@cindex DLLs, creating
2317@kindex --export-all-symbols
2318@item --export-all-symbols
2319If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2320be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2321otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2322explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2323attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2324option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2325@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2326@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2327exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2328re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2329such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2330@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2331@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2332Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2333not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2334extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2335(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2336These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2337@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2338@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2339@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2340@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2341[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2342
2343@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2344@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2345Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2346exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2347[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2348
2927aaca
NC
2349@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2350@item --exclude-all-symbols
2351Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2352[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2353
252b5132
RH
2354@kindex --file-alignment
2355@item --file-alignment
2356Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2357file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2358512.
bb10df36 2359[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2360
2361@cindex heap size
2362@kindex --heap
2363@item --heap @var{reserve}
2364@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2365Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2366to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2367committed.
bb10df36 2368[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2369
2370@cindex image base
2371@kindex --image-base
2372@item --image-base @var{value}
2373Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2374the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2375is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2376your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2377other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2378for dlls.
bb10df36 2379[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2380
2381@kindex --kill-at
2382@item --kill-at
2383If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2384symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2385[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2386
26d2d8a2
BF
2387@kindex --large-address-aware
2388@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2389If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2390header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2391greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2392or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2393section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2394[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2395
f69a2f97
NC
2396@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2397@item --disable-large-address-aware
2398Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2399This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2400driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2401addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2402[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2403
252b5132
RH
2404@kindex --major-image-version
2405@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2406Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2407[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2408
2409@kindex --major-os-version
2410@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2411Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2412[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2413
2414@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2415@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2416Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2417[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2418
2419@kindex --minor-image-version
2420@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2421Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2422[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2423
2424@kindex --minor-os-version
2425@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2426Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2427[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2428
2429@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2430@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2431Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2432[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2433
2434@cindex DEF files, creating
2435@cindex DLLs, creating
2436@kindex --output-def
2437@item --output-def @var{file}
2438The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2439file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2440(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2441library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2442automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2443[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2444
b044cda1
CW
2445@cindex DLLs, creating
2446@kindex --out-implib
2447@item --out-implib @var{file}
2448The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2449import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2450import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2451may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2452makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2453creation step.
bb10df36 2454[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2455
2456@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2457@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2458@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2459Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2460@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2461By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2462for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2463execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2464[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2465
2466@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2467@item --disable-auto-image-base
2468Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2469user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2470default.
bb10df36 2471[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2472
2473@cindex DLLs, linking to
2474@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2475@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2476When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2477search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2478@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2479between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2480uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2481@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2482[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2483
2484@kindex --enable-auto-import
2485@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2486Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2487DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2488building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2489'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2490to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2491specification published by Microsoft.
2492
e2a83dd0
NC
2493Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2494data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2495placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2496around a problem with consts that is described here:
2497http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2498
4d8907ac
DS
2499Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2500see this message:
0d888aac 2501
ece2d90e 2502"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2503documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2504
ece2d90e
NC
2505This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2506ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2507allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2508fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2509constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2510multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2511this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2512of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2513the warning, and exit.
2514
2515There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2516data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2517
2fa9fc65
NC
2518One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2519of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2520this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2521
c0065db7
RM
2522A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2523that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2524there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2525a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2526
2527@example
2528extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2529extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2530 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2531@end example
2532
2533or
2534
2535@example
2536extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2537extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2538 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2539@end example
2540
c0065db7 2541For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2542is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2543
2544@example
2545extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2546extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2547 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2548@end example
2549
c406afaf
NC
2550or
2551
2552@example
2553extern long long extern_ll;
2554extern_ll -->
2555 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2556@end example
2557
2fa9fc65 2558A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2559'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2560@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2561requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2562building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2563merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2564between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2565constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2566
2567Original:
2568@example
2569--foo.h
2570extern int arr[];
2571--foo.c
2572#include "foo.h"
2573void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2574 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2575@}
2576@end example
2577
2578Solution 1:
2579@example
2580--foo.h
2581extern int arr[];
2582--foo.c
2583#include "foo.h"
2584void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2585 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2586 volatile int *parr = arr;
2587 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2588@}
2589@end example
2590
2591Solution 2:
2592@example
2593--foo.h
2594/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2595#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2596 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2597#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2598#else
2599#define FOO_IMPORT
2600#endif
2601extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2602--foo.c
2603#include "foo.h"
2604void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2605 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2606@}
2607@end example
2608
c0065db7 2609A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2610library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2611for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2612functions).
bb10df36 2613[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2614
2615@kindex --disable-auto-import
2616@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2617Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2618@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2619[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2620
2fa9fc65
NC
2621@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2622@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2623If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2624that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2625a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2626environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2627[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2628
2629@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2630@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2631Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2632DLLs.
bb10df36 2633[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2634
b044cda1
CW
2635@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2636@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2637Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2638[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2639
252b5132
RH
2640@kindex --section-alignment
2641@item --section-alignment
2642Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2643addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2644[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2645
2646@cindex stack size
2647@kindex --stack
2648@item --stack @var{reserve}
2649@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2650Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2651to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2652committed.
bb10df36 2653[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2654
2655@kindex --subsystem
2656@item --subsystem @var{which}
2657@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2658@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2659Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2660legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2661@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2662the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2663@var{which}.
bb10df36 2664[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2665
2f563b51
DK
2666The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2667of the PE file header:
2668[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2669
2d5c3743
NC
2670@kindex --high-entropy-va
2671@item --high-entropy-va
2672Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2673(ASLR).
2674
2f563b51
DK
2675@kindex --dynamicbase
2676@item --dynamicbase
2677The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2678randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2679Vista for i386 PE targets.
2680
2681@kindex --forceinteg
2682@item --forceinteg
2683Code integrity checks are enforced.
2684
2685@kindex --nxcompat
2686@item --nxcompat
2687The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2688This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2689
2690@kindex --no-isolation
2691@item --no-isolation
2692Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2693
2694@kindex --no-seh
2695@item --no-seh
2696The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2697this image.
2698
2699@kindex --no-bind
2700@item --no-bind
2701Do not bind this image.
2702
2703@kindex --wdmdriver
2704@item --wdmdriver
2705The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2706
2f563b51
DK
2707@kindex --tsaware
2708@item --tsaware
2709The image is Terminal Server aware.
2710
0cb112f7
CF
2711@kindex --insert-timestamp
2712@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2713@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2714Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2715as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2716other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2717will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2718same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2719can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2720that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2721identically.
252b5132
RH
2722@end table
2723
0285c67d
NC
2724@c man end
2725
ac145307
BS
2726@ifset C6X
2727@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2728
2729@c man begin OPTIONS
2730
2731The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2732libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2733all executables use an index of 0.
2734
2735@table @gcctabopt
2736
2737@kindex --dsbt-size
2738@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2739This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2740or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2741entries.
2742
2743@kindex --dsbt-index
2744@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2745This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2746to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2747executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2748@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2749
fbd9ad90
PB
2750@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2751The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2752exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2753
ac145307
BS
2754@end table
2755
2756@c man end
2757@end ifset
2758
93fd0973
SC
2759@ifset M68HC11
2760@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2761
2762@c man begin OPTIONS
2763
2764The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2765memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2766
2767@table @gcctabopt
2768
2769@kindex --no-trampoline
2770@item --no-trampoline
2771This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2772is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2773instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2774
2775@kindex --bank-window
2776@item --bank-window @var{name}
2777This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2778the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2779The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2780paging and addresses within the memory window.
2781
2782@end table
2783
2784@c man end
2785@end ifset
2786
7fb9f789
NC
2787@ifset M68K
2788@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2789
2790@c man begin OPTIONS
2791
2792The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2793when linking for 68K targets.
2794
2795@table @gcctabopt
2796
2797@kindex --got
2798@item --got=@var{type}
2799This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2800@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2801@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2802Info entry for @file{ld}.
2803
2804@end table
2805
2806@c man end
2807@end ifset
2808
833794fc
MR
2809@ifset MIPS
2810@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2811
2812@c man begin OPTIONS
2813
2814The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2815generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2816
2817@table @gcctabopt
2818
2819@kindex --insn32
2820@item --insn32
2821@kindex --no-insn32
2822@itemx --no-insn32
2823These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2824generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2825or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
282632-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2827used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2828possible.
2829
2830@end table
2831
2832@c man end
2833@end ifset
2834
252b5132
RH
2835@ifset UsesEnvVars
2836@node Environment
2837@section Environment Variables
2838
0285c67d
NC
2839@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2840
560e09e9 2841You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2842@ifclear SingleFormat
2843@code{GNUTARGET},
2844@end ifclear
2845@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2846
36f63dca 2847@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2848@kindex GNUTARGET
2849@cindex default input format
2850@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2851use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2852of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2853@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2854of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2855attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2856this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2857there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2858object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2859BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2860in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2861@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2862
2863@kindex LDEMULATION
2864@cindex default emulation
2865@cindex emulation, default
2866@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2867@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2868behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2869available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2870the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2871variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2872linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2873
2874@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2875@cindex demangling, default
2876Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2877@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2878default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2879a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2880may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2881options.
2882
0285c67d
NC
2883@c man end
2884@end ifset
2885
252b5132
RH
2886@node Scripts
2887@chapter Linker Scripts
2888
2889@cindex scripts
2890@cindex linker scripts
2891@cindex command files
2892Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2893written in the linker command language.
2894
2895The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2896the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2897the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2898more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2899direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2900described below.
2901
2902The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2903yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2904linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2905to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2906such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2907
2908You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2909line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2910default linker script.
2911
2912You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2913to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2914Linker Scripts}.
2915
2916@menu
2917* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2918* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2919* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2920* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2921* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2922* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2923* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2924* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2925* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2926* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2927* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2928@end menu
2929
2930@node Basic Script Concepts
2931@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2932@cindex linker script concepts
2933We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2934describe the linker script language.
2935
2936The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2937file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2938@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2939The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2940purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2941among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2942section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2943in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2944
2945Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2946also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2947contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2948the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2949A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2950area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2951loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2952which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2953of debugging information.
2954
2955Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2956first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2957the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2958@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2959section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2960same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2961is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2962(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2963based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2964RAM address would be the VMA.
2965
2966You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2967program with the @samp{-h} option.
2968
2969Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2970@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2971has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2972information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2973will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2974static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2975referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2976
2977You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2978program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2979option.
2980
2981@node Script Format
2982@section Linker Script Format
2983@cindex linker script format
2984Linker scripts are text files.
2985
2986You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2987either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2988symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2989generally ignored.
2990
2991Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2992If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2993otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2994double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2995file name.
2996
2997You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2998@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2999to whitespace.
3000
3001@node Simple Example
3002@section Simple Linker Script Example
3003@cindex linker script example
3004@cindex example of linker script
3005Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3006
3007The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3008@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3009memory layout of the output file.
3010
3011The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3012describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3013code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3014@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3015Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3016your input files.
3017
3018For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30190x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3020linker script which will do that:
3021@smallexample
3022SECTIONS
3023@{
3024 . = 0x10000;
3025 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3026 . = 0x8000000;
3027 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3028 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3029@}
3030@end smallexample
3031
3032You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3033followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3034descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3035
252b5132
RH
3036The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3037sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3038counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3039other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3040current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3041incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3042@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3043
3044The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3045required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3046after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3047which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3048wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3049means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3050
3051Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3052@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3053@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3054
3055The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3056the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3057at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3058output section, the value of the location counter will be
3059@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3060effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3061immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3062
3063The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3064alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3065example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3066sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3067may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3068sections.
3069
3070That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3071
3072@node Simple Commands
3073@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3074@cindex linker script simple commands
3075In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3076
3077@menu
3078* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3079* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3080@ifclear SingleFormat
3081* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3082@end ifclear
3083
4a93e180 3084* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3085* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3086@end menu
3087
3088@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3089@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3090@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3091@cindex start of execution
3092@cindex first instruction
3093@cindex entry point
3094The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3095point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3096entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3097@smallexample
3098ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3099@end smallexample
3100
3101There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3102entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3103stopping when one of them succeeds:
3104@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3105@item
252b5132 3106the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3107@item
252b5132 3108the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3109@item
3ab904c4
NC
3110the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3111targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3112check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3113@item
252b5132 3114the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3115@item
252b5132
RH
3116The address @code{0}.
3117@end itemize
3118
3119@node File Commands
36f63dca 3120@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3121@cindex linker script file commands
3122Several linker script commands deal with files.
3123
3124@table @code
3125@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3126@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3127@cindex including a linker script
3128Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3129be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3130with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
313110 levels deep.
3132
4006703d
NS
3133You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3134@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3135
252b5132
RH
3136@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3137@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3138@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3139@cindex input files in linker scripts
3140@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3141@cindex linker script input object files
3142The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3143in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3144
3145For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3146a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3147then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3148
3149In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3150script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3151
e3f2db7f
AO
3152In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3153with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3154located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3155for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3156open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3157linker will search through the archive library search path.
3158The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3159as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3160description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3161
ff5dcc92 3162If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3163name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3164@samp{-l}.
3165
3166When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3167files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3168script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3169
3170@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3171@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3172@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3173@cindex grouping input files
3174The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3175files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3176new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3177in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3178
b717d30e
JJ
3179@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3180@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3181@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3182This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3183commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3184as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3185with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3186when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3187@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3188and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3189setting afterwards.
3190
252b5132
RH
3191@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3192@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3193@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3194The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3195@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3196@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3197Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3198precedence.
3199
3200You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3201output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3202
3203@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3204@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3205@cindex library search path in linker script
3206@cindex archive search path in linker script
3207@cindex search path in linker script
3208The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3209@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3210@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3211on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3212are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3213the command line option are searched first.
3214
3215@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3216@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3217@cindex first input file
3218The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3219that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3220though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3221when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3222first file.
3223@end table
3224
3225@ifclear SingleFormat
3226@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3227@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3228A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3229
3230@table @code
3231@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3232@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3233@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3234@cindex output file format in linker script
3235The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3236output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3237exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3238(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3239line option takes precedence.
3240
3241You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3242formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3243This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3244desired endianness.
3245
3246If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3247will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3248output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3249used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3250
3251For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3252command:
3253@smallexample
3254OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3255@end smallexample
3256This says that the default format for the output file is
3257@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3258option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3259format.
3260
3261@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3262@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3263@cindex input file format in linker script
3264The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3265files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3266This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3267(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3268is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3269command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3270@end table
3271@end ifclear
3272
4a93e180
NC
3273@node REGION_ALIAS
3274@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3275@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3276@cindex region alias
3277@cindex region names
3278
3279Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3280@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3281
3282@smallexample
3283REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3284@end smallexample
3285
3286The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3287memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3288to memory regions. An example follows.
3289
3290Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3291memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3292that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3293non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3294access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3295read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3296sections:
3297
3298@itemize @bullet
3299@item
3300@code{.text} program code;
3301@item
3302@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3303@item
3304@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3305@item
3306@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3307@end itemize
3308
3309The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3310part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3311output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3312systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3313@code{C}:
3314@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3315@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3316@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3317@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3318@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3319@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3320@end multitable
3321The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3322loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3323the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3324the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3325
3326The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3327includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3328memory layout:
3329@smallexample
3330INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3331
3332SECTIONS
3333 @{
3334 .text :
3335 @{
3336 *(.text)
3337 @} > REGION_TEXT
3338 .rodata :
3339 @{
3340 *(.rodata)
3341 rodata_end = .;
3342 @} > REGION_RODATA
3343 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3344 @{
3345 data_start = .;
3346 *(.data)
3347 @} > REGION_DATA
3348 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3349 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3350 .bss :
3351 @{
3352 *(.bss)
3353 @} > REGION_BSS
3354 @}
3355@end smallexample
3356
3357Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3358regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3359variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3360@table @code
3361@item A
3362Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3363@smallexample
3364MEMORY
3365 @{
3366 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3367 @}
3368
3369REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3370REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3371REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3372REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3373@end smallexample
3374@item B
3375Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3376into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3377@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3378@smallexample
3379MEMORY
3380 @{
3381 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3382 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3383 @}
3384
3385REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3386REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3387REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3388REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3389@end smallexample
3390@item C
3391Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3392@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3393initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3394system start into the @code{RAM}.
3395@smallexample
3396MEMORY
3397 @{
3398 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3399 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3400 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3401 @}
3402
3403REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3404REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3405REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3406REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3407@end smallexample
3408@end table
3409
3410It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3411@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3412necessary:
3413@smallexample
3414#include <string.h>
3415
3416extern char data_start [];
3417extern char data_size [];
3418extern char data_load_start [];
3419
3420void copy_data(void)
3421@{
3422 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3423 @{
3424 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3425 @}
3426@}
3427@end smallexample
3428
252b5132 3429@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3430@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3431There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3432
3433@table @code
3434@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3435@kindex ASSERT
3436@cindex assertion in linker script
3437Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3438with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3439
3440@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3441@kindex EXTERN
3442@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3443Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3444symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3445modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3446each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3447command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3448
3449@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3450@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3451@cindex common allocation in linker script
3452This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3453to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3454output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3455
4818e05f
AM
3456@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3457@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3458@cindex common allocation in linker script
3459This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3460command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3461to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3462
53d25da6
AM
3463@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3464@kindex INSERT
3465@cindex insert user script into default script
3466This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3467augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3468inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3469@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3470default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3471sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3472linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3473insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3474linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3475default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3476of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3477to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3478is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3479
3480@smallexample
3481SECTIONS
3482@{
3483 OVERLAY :
3484 @{
3485 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3486 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3487 @}
3488@}
3489INSERT AFTER .text;
3490@end smallexample
3491
252b5132
RH
3492@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3493@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3494@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3495This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3496references among certain output sections.
3497
3498In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3499using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3500will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3501errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3502a function defined in the other section.
3503
3504The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3505@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3506an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3507@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3508names.
3509
3510@ifclear SingleFormat
3511@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3512@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3513@cindex machine architecture
3514@cindex architecture
3515Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3516of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3517architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3518the @samp{-f} option.
3519@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3520
3521@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3522@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3523This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3524@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3525in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3526@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3527@end table
3528
3529@node Assignments
3530@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3531@cindex assignment in scripts
3532@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3533@cindex variables, defining
3534You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3535the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3536
3537@menu
3538* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3539* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3540* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3541* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3542* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3543@end menu
3544
3545@node Simple Assignments
3546@subsection Simple Assignments
3547
3548You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3549
3550@table @code
3551@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3552@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3553@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3554@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3555@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3556@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3557@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3558@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3559@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3560@end table
3561
3562The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3563@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3564defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3565
3566The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3567may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3568
3569The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3570
3571Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3572
3573You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3574statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3575section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3576
3577The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3578expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3579
3580Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3581assignments may be used:
3582
3583@smallexample
3584floating_point = 0;
3585SECTIONS
3586@{
3587 .text :
3588 @{
3589 *(.text)
3590 _etext = .;
3591 @}
156e34dd 3592 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3593 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3594@}
3595@end smallexample
3596@noindent
3597In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3598zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3599the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3600defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3601upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3602
eb8476a6
MR
3603@node HIDDEN
3604@subsection HIDDEN
3605@cindex HIDDEN
3606For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3607exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3608
3609Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3610@code{HIDDEN}:
3611
3612@smallexample
3613HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3614SECTIONS
3615@{
3616 .text :
3617 @{
3618 *(.text)
3619 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3620 @}
3621 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3622 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3623@}
3624@end smallexample
3625@noindent
3626In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3627
252b5132
RH
3628@node PROVIDE
3629@subsection PROVIDE
3630@cindex PROVIDE
3631In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3632only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3633the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3634@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3635@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3636@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3637@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3638@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3639
3640Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3641@smallexample
3642SECTIONS
3643@{
3644 .text :
3645 @{
3646 *(.text)
3647 _etext = .;
3648 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3649 @}
3650@}
3651@end smallexample
3652
3653In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3654underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3655the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3656underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3657If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3658linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3659
7af8e998
L
3660@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3661@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3662@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3663Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3664hidden and won't be exported.
3665
73ae6183
NC
3666@node Source Code Reference
3667@subsection Source Code Reference
3668
3669Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3670intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3671a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3672symbol that does not have a value.
3673
3674Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3675transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3676stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3677prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3678mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3679of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3680variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3681linker script variable might be referred to as:
3682
3683@smallexample
3684 extern int foo;
3685@end smallexample
3686
3687But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3688
3689@smallexample
3690 _foo = 1000;
3691@end smallexample
3692
3693In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3694transformation has taken place.
3695
3696When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3697things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3698in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3699second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3700table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3701contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3702value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3703
3704@smallexample
3705 int foo = 1000;
3706@end smallexample
3707
10bf6894 3708creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3709holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3710number 1000 is initially stored.
3711
3712When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3713first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3714memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3715So:
3716
3717@smallexample
3718 foo = 1;
3719@end smallexample
3720
3721looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3722associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3723address. Whereas:
3724
3725@smallexample
3726 int * a = & foo;
3727@end smallexample
3728
10bf6894 3729looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3730and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3731the variable @samp{a}.
3732
3733Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3734the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3735an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3736
3737@smallexample
3738 foo = 1000;
3739@end smallexample
3740
3741creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3742the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3743address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3744linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3745access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3746
3747Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3748you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3749use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3750section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3751linker script contains these declarations:
3752
3753@smallexample
3754@group
3755 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3756 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3757 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3758@end group
3759@end smallexample
3760
3761Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3762
3763@smallexample
3764@group
3765 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3766
73ae6183
NC
3767 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3768@end group
3769@end smallexample
3770
3771Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3772
252b5132 3773@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3774@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3775@kindex SECTIONS
3776The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3777into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3778
3779The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3780@smallexample
3781SECTIONS
3782@{
3783 @var{sections-command}
3784 @var{sections-command}
3785 @dots{}
3786@}
3787@end smallexample
3788
3789Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3790
3791@itemize @bullet
3792@item
3793an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3794@item
3795a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3796@item
3797an output section description
3798@item
3799an overlay description
3800@end itemize
3801
3802The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3803@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3804those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3805understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3806the layout of the output file.
3807
3808Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3809below.
3810
3811If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3812linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3813section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3814input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3815example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3816in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3817
3818@menu
3819* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3820* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3821* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3822* Input Section:: Input section description
3823* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3824* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3825* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3826* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3827* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3828@end menu
3829
3830@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3831@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3832The full description of an output section looks like this:
3833@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3834@group
7e7d5768 3835@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3836 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3837 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3838 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3839 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3840 @{
3841 @var{output-section-command}
3842 @var{output-section-command}
3843 @dots{}
abc9061b 3844 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3845@end group
3846@end smallexample
3847
3848Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3849
3850The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3851name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3852The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3853the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3854The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3855
3856Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3857
3858@itemize @bullet
3859@item
3860a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3861@item
3862an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3863@item
3864data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3865@item
3866a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3867@end itemize
3868
3869@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3870@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3871@cindex name, section
3872@cindex section name
3873The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3874meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3875support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3876must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3877example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3878output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3879names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3880quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3881characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3882commas must be quoted.
3883
3884The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3885Discarding}.
3886
3887@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3888@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3889@cindex address, section
3890@cindex section address
3891The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3892address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3893is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3894
3895If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3896section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3897to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3898alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3899contained within the output section.
3900
3901The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3902
3903@itemize @bullet
3904@item
3905If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3906is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3907in that region.
3908
3909@item
3910If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3911regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3912section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3913be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3914
3915@item
3916If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3917the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3918counter.
3919@end itemize
3920
3921@noindent
3922For example:
3923
252b5132
RH
3924@smallexample
3925.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3926@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3927
252b5132
RH
3928@noindent
3929and
ea5cae92 3930
252b5132
RH
3931@smallexample
3932.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3933@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3934
252b5132
RH
3935@noindent
3936are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3937@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3938counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3939counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3940input sections.
252b5132
RH
3941
3942The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3943For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3944so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3945do something like this:
3946@smallexample
3947.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3948@end smallexample
3949@noindent
3950This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3951aligned upward to the specified value.
3952
3953Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3954location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3955sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3956
3957@node Input Section
36f63dca 3958@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3959@cindex input sections
3960@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3961The most common output section command is an input section description.
3962
3963The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3964You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3965in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3966map the input files into your memory layout.
3967
3968@menu
3969* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3970* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3971* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3972* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3973* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3974@end menu
3975
3976@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3977@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3978@cindex input section basics
3979An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3980by a list of section names in parentheses.
3981
3982The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3983describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3984
3985The most common input section description is to include all input
3986sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3987include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3988@smallexample
3989*(.text)
3990@end smallexample
3991@noindent
18625d54
CM
3992Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3993of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3994match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3995example:
252b5132 3996@smallexample
b4346c09 3997*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3998@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3999will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4000@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4001
4002There are two ways to include more than one section:
4003@smallexample
4004*(.text .rdata)
4005*(.text) *(.rdata)
4006@end smallexample
4007@noindent
4008The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4009@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4010first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4011they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4012@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4013@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4014
4015You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4016You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4017needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4018@smallexample
4019data.o(.data)
4020@end smallexample
4021
ae17ab41
CM
4022To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4023of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4024
4025Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4026
4027@smallexample
4028@group
4029SECTIONS @{
4030 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4031 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4032@}
4033@end group
4034@end smallexample
4035
4036In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4037input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4038@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4039@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4040whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4041
967928e9
AM
4042You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4043matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4044with no whitespace around the colon.
4045
4046@table @samp
4047@item archive:file
4048matches file within archive
4049@item archive:
4050matches the whole archive
4051@item :file
4052matches file but not one in an archive
4053@end table
4054
4055Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4056wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4057single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4058@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4059within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4060also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4061other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4062from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4063command.
4064
252b5132
RH
4065If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4066the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4067commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4068@smallexample
4069data.o
4070@end smallexample
4071
967928e9
AM
4072When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4073and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4074characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4075name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4076did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4077though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4078@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4079the archive search path.
4080
4081@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4082@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4083@cindex input section wildcards
4084@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4085@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4086@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4087In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4088name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4089
4090The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4091pattern for the file name.
4092
4093The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4094
4095@table @samp
4096@item *
4097matches any number of characters
4098@item ?
4099matches any single character
4100@item [@var{chars}]
4101matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4102character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4103@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4104@item \
4105quotes the following character
4106@end table
4107
4108When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4109will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4110Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4111exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4112@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4113a @samp{/} character.
4114
4115File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4116specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4117does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4118
4119If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4120appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4121will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4122sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4123@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4124@smallexample
4125.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4126.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4127@end smallexample
4128
bcaa7b3e 4129@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4130Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4131in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4132this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4133pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4134@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4135into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4136
bcaa7b3e
L
4137@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4138@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4139difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4140descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4141Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4142reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4143
02ecc8e9
L
4144@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4145@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4146difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4147ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4148encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4149
bcaa7b3e
L
4150@cindex SORT
4151@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4152
4153When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4154can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4155
4156@enumerate
4157@item
4158@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4159It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4160sections have the same name.
4161@item
4162@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4163It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4164sections have the same alignment.
4165@item
c0065db7 4166@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4167treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4168@item
4169@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4170is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4171@item
4172All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4173@end enumerate
4174
4175When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4176section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4177takes precedence over the command line option.
4178
4179If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4180command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4181treated as nested sorting command.
4182
4183@enumerate
4184@item
4185@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4186@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4187@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4188@item
4189@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4190@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4191@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4192@end enumerate
4193
4194If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4195command line option will be ignored.
4196
eda680f8
L
4197@cindex SORT_NONE
4198@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4199section sorting option.
4200
252b5132
RH
4201If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4202@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4203precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4204
4205This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4206files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4207sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4208The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4209with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4210linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4211@smallexample
4212@group
4213SECTIONS @{
4214 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4215 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4216 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4217 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4218@}
4219@end group
4220@end smallexample
4221
4222@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4223@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4224@cindex common symbol placement
4225@cindex uninitialized data placement
4226A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4227file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4228linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4229named @samp{COMMON}.
4230
4231You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4232other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4233particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4234input files are placed in another section.
4235
4236In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4237@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4238@smallexample
4239.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4240@end smallexample
4241
4242@cindex scommon section
4243@cindex small common symbols
4244Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4245example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4246symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4247different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4248the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4249symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4250to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4251locations.
4252
4253@cindex [COMMON]
4254You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4255notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4256@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4257
4258@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4259@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4260@cindex KEEP
4261@cindex garbage collection
4262When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4263it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4264This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4265with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4266@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4267
4268@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4269@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4270The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4271to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4272start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4273@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4274follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4275@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4276@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4277All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4278files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4279
4280@smallexample
4281@group
4282SECTIONS @{
4283 outputa 0x10000 :
4284 @{
4285 all.o
4286 foo.o (.input1)
4287 @}
36f63dca
NC
4288@end group
4289@group
252b5132
RH
4290 outputb :
4291 @{
4292 foo.o (.input2)
4293 foo1.o (.input1)
4294 @}
36f63dca
NC
4295@end group
4296@group
252b5132
RH
4297 outputc :
4298 @{
4299 *(.input1)
4300 *(.input2)
4301 @}
4302@}
4303@end group
a1ab1d2a 4304@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4305
4306@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4307@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4308@cindex data
4309@cindex section data
4310@cindex output section data
4311@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4312@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4313@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4314@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4315@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4316You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4317@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4318an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4319parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4320value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4321counter.
4322
4323The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4324store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4325bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4326stored.
4327
4328For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4329of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4330@smallexample
4331BYTE(1)
4332LONG(addr)
4333@end smallexample
4334
4335When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4336same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4337target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4338@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4339@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4340
4341If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4342which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4343When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4344true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4345endianness of the first input object file.
4346
36f63dca 4347Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4348between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4349@smallexample
4350SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4351@end smallexample
4352whereas this will work:
4353@smallexample
4354SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4355@end smallexample
4356
252b5132
RH
4357@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4358@cindex holes, filling
4359@cindex unspecified memory
4360You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4361current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4362otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4363gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4364with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4365necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4366point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4367than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4368different parts of an output section.
4369
4370This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4371value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4372@smallexample
563e308f 4373FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4374@end smallexample
4375
4376The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4377section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4378part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4379entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4380precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4381expression.
252b5132
RH
4382
4383@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4384@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4385There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4386commands.
4387
4388@table @code
4389@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4390@cindex input filename symbols
4391@cindex filename symbols
4392@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4393The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4394The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4395file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4396the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4397
4398This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4399normally used for any other object file format.
4400
4401@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4402@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4403@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4404@item CONSTRUCTORS
4405When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4406unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4407destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4408arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4409automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4410For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4411linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4412@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4413ignored for other object file formats.
4414
4415The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4416constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4417Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4418the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4419first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4420of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4421compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4422formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4423@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4424the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4425destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4426@code{exit}.
4427
4428For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4429arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4430addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4431and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4432linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4433runtime code expects to see.
4434
4435@smallexample
4436 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4437 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4438 *(.ctors)
4439 LONG(0)
4440 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4441 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4442 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4443 *(.dtors)
4444 LONG(0)
4445 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4446@end smallexample
4447
4448If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4449which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4450are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4451are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4452command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4453@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4454@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4455@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4456
4457Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4458and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4459need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4460scripts.
4461
4462@end table
4463
4464@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4465@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4466@cindex discarding sections
4467@cindex sections, discarding
4468@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4469The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4470This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4471may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4472@smallexample
49c13adb 4473.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4474@end smallexample
4475@noindent
4476will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4477@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4478sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4479space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4480too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4481space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4482@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4483@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4484This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4485
a0976ea4 4486The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4487on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4488symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4489the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4490section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4491
4492@cindex /DISCARD/
4493The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4494input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4495section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4496
4497@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4498@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4499@cindex output section attributes
4500We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4501like this:
0c71d759 4502
252b5132 4503@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4504@group
7e7d5768 4505@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4506 [AT(@var{lma})]
4507 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4508 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4509 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4510 @{
4511 @var{output-section-command}
4512 @var{output-section-command}
4513 @dots{}
562d3460 4514 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4515@end group
4516@end smallexample
0c71d759 4517
252b5132
RH
4518We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4519@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4520remaining section attributes.
4521
a1ab1d2a 4522@menu
252b5132
RH
4523* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4524* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4525* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4526* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4527* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4528* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4529* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4530* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4531@end menu
4532
4533@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4534@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4535Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4536parentheses. The following types are defined:
4537
4538@table @code
4539@item NOLOAD
4540The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4541loaded into memory when the program is run.
4542@item DSECT
4543@itemx COPY
4544@itemx INFO
4545@itemx OVERLAY
4546These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4547rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4548marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4549section when the program is run.
4550@end table
4551
4552@kindex NOLOAD
4553@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4554@cindex loading, preventing
4555The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4556the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4557the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4558@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4559need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4560@smallexample
4561@group
4562SECTIONS @{
4563 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4564 @dots{}
4565@}
4566@end group
4567@end smallexample
4568
4569@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4570@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4571@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4572@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4573@cindex load address
4574@cindex section load address
4575Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4576@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4577@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4578specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4579address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4580
ea5cae92
NC
4581The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4582specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4583takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4584load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4585region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4586
4587If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4588section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4589load address:
4590
4591@itemize @bullet
4592@item
4593If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4594the LMA address as well.
4595
4596@item
4597If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4598
4599@item
4600Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4601with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4602section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4603VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4604the last section in the located region.
4605
4606@item
4607If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4608that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4609
4610@item
4611If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4612section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4613@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4614
4615@cindex ROM initialized data
4616@cindex initialized data in ROM
4617This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4618example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4619called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4620@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4621even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4622uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4623defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4624counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4625
4626@smallexample
4627@group
4628SECTIONS
4629 @{
4630 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4631 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4632 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4633 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4634 .bss 0x3000 :
4635 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4636@}
4637@end group
4638@end smallexample
4639
4640The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4641this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4642the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4643how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4644script.
4645
4646@smallexample
4647@group
4648extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4649char *src = &_etext;
4650char *dst = &_data;
4651
ea5cae92
NC
4652/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4653while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4654 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4655
ea5cae92 4656/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4657for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4658 *dst = 0;
4659@end group
4660@end smallexample
4661
bbf115d3
L
4662@node Forced Output Alignment
4663@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4664@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4665@cindex forcing output section alignment
4666@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4667You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4668alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4669intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4670
7e7d5768
AM
4671@node Forced Input Alignment
4672@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4673@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4674@cindex forcing input section alignment
4675@cindex input section alignment
4676You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4677SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4678sections, whether larger or smaller.
4679
0c71d759
NC
4680@node Output Section Constraint
4681@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4682@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4683@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4684@cindex constraints on output sections
4685You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4686of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4687read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4688@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4689
252b5132 4690@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4691@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4692@kindex >@var{region}
4693@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4694@cindex memory regions and sections
4695You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4696using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4697
4698Here is a simple example:
4699@smallexample
4700@group
4701MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4702SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4703@end group
4704@end smallexample
4705
4706@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4707@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4708@kindex :@var{phdr}
4709@cindex section, assigning to program header
4710@cindex program headers and sections
4711You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4712using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4713one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4714assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4715@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4716linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4717
4718Here is a simple example:
4719@smallexample
4720@group
4721PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4722SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4723@end group
4724@end smallexample
4725
4726@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4727@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4728@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4729@cindex section fill pattern
4730@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4731You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4732@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4733(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4734within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4735alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4736necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4737of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4738an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4739fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4740other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4741pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4742expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4743
4744You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4745output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4746
4747Here is a simple example:
4748@smallexample
4749@group
563e308f 4750SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4751@end group
4752@end smallexample
4753
4754@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4755@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4756@kindex OVERLAY
4757@cindex overlays
4758An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4759are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4760the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4761copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4762required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4763can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4764than another.
4765
4766Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4767@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4768output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4769command is as follows:
4770@smallexample
4771@group
4772OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4773 @{
4774 @var{secname1}
4775 @{
4776 @var{output-section-command}
4777 @var{output-section-command}
4778 @dots{}
4779 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4780 @var{secname2}
4781 @{
4782 @var{output-section-command}
4783 @var{output-section-command}
4784 @dots{}
4785 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4786 @dots{}
abc9061b 4787 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4788@end group
4789@end smallexample
4790
4791Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4792section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4793section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4794those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4795except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4796sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4797
abc9061b
CC
4798The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4799the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4800
252b5132
RH
4801The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4802addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4803memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4804whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4805and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4806and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4807
56dd11f0
NC
4808If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4809references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4810the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4811sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4812@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4813
4814For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4815provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4816defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4817@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4818the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4819within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4820symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4821
4822At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4823the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4824
4825Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4826@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4827@smallexample
4828@group
4829 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4830 @{
4831 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4832 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4833 @}
4834@end group
4835@end smallexample
4836@noindent
4837This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4838address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4839@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4840following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4841@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4842@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4843
4844C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4845like the following.
4846
4847@smallexample
4848@group
4849 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4850 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4851 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4852@end group
4853@end smallexample
4854
4855Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4856everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4857example could have been written identically as follows.
4858
4859@smallexample
4860@group
4861 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4862 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4863 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4864 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4865 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4866 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4867 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4868@end group
4869@end smallexample
4870
4871@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4872@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4873@kindex MEMORY
4874@cindex memory regions
4875@cindex regions of memory
4876@cindex allocating memory
4877@cindex discontinuous memory
4878The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4879memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4880
4881The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4882memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4883may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4884can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4885set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4886regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4887around to fit into the available regions.
4888
4889A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4890command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4891you wish. The syntax is:
4892@smallexample
4893@group
a1ab1d2a 4894MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4895 @{
4896 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4897 @dots{}
4898 @}
4899@end group
4900@end smallexample
4901
4902The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4903region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4904Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4905with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4906must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4907add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4908command.
252b5132
RH
4909
4910@cindex memory region attributes
4911The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4912whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4913not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4914@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4915section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4916the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4917them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4918
4919The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4920@table @samp
4921@item R
4922Read-only section
4923@item W
4924Read/write section
4925@item X
4926Executable section
4927@item A
4928Allocatable section
4929@item I
4930Initialized section
4931@item L
4932Same as @samp{I}
4933@item !
c09e9a8c 4934Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4935@end table
4936
4937If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4938@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4939attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4940in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4941attributes.
4942
4943@kindex ORIGIN =
4944@kindex o =
4945@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4946The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4947the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4948cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4949abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4950@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4951
4952@kindex LENGTH =
4953@kindex len =
4954@kindex l =
4955The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4956region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4957be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4958@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4959
4960In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4961available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4962and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4963linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4964is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4965or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4966explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4967region.
4968
4969@smallexample
4970@group
a1ab1d2a 4971MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4972 @{
4973 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4974 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4975 @}
4976@end group
4977@end smallexample
4978
4979Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4980specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4981@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4982a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4983output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4984was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4985the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4986output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4987region, the linker will issue an error message.
4988
3ec57632 4989It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4990expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4991@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4992
4993@smallexample
4994@group
c0065db7 4995 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4996@end group
4997@end smallexample
4998
252b5132
RH
4999@node PHDRS
5000@section PHDRS Command
5001@kindex PHDRS
5002@cindex program headers
5003@cindex ELF program headers
5004@cindex program segments
5005@cindex segments, ELF
5006The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5007@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5008loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5009program with the @samp{-p} option.
5010
5011When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5012reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5013program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5014This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5015interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5016
5017The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5018in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5019precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5020the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5021not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5022
5023The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5024generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5025ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5026
5027This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5028@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5029
5030@smallexample
5031@group
5032PHDRS
5033@{
5034 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5035 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5036@}
5037@end group
5038@end smallexample
5039
5040The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5041of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5042header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5043with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5044must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5045is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5046
5047Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5048system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5049specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5050sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5051attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5052Section Phdr}.
5053
5054It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5055merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5056repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5057contain the section.
5058
5059If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5060then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5061not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5062convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5063placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5064default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5065segment at all.
5066
5067@kindex FILEHDR
5068@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5069You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5070the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5071The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5072file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5073include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5074segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5075these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5076
5077The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5078value of the keyword.
5079
5080@table @asis
5081@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5082Indicates an unused program header.
5083
5084@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5085Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5086the file.
5087
5088@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5089Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5090
5091@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5092Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5093found.
5094
5095@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5096Indicates a segment holding note information.
5097
5098@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5099A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5100ABI.
5101
5102@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5103Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5104
5105@item @var{expression}
5106An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5107be used for types not defined above.
5108@end table
5109
5110You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5111in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5112@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5113Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5114output section attribute.
5115
5116The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5117which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5118explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5119an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5120header.
5121
5122Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5123headers used on a native ELF system.
5124
5125@example
5126@group
5127PHDRS
5128@{
5129 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5130 interp PT_INTERP ;
5131 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5132 data PT_LOAD ;
5133 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5134@}
5135
5136SECTIONS
5137@{
5138 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5139 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5140 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5141 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5142 @dots{}
5143 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5144 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5145 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5146 @dots{}
5147@}
5148@end group
5149@end example
5150
5151@node VERSION
5152@section VERSION Command
5153@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5154@cindex symbol versions
5155@cindex version script
5156@cindex versions of symbols
5157The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5158only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5159symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5160a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5161shared library.
5162
5163You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5164you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5165also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5166
5167The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5168@smallexample
5169VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5170@end smallexample
5171
5172The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5173Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5174version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5175version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5176version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5177scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5178library.
5179
5180The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5181examples.
5182
5183@smallexample
5184VERS_1.1 @{
5185 global:
5186 foo1;
5187 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5188 old*;
5189 original*;
5190 new*;
252b5132
RH
5191@};
5192
5193VERS_1.2 @{
5194 foo2;
5195@} VERS_1.1;
5196
5197VERS_2.0 @{
5198 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5199 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5200 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5201 "f(int, double)";
5202 @};
252b5132
RH
5203@} VERS_1.2;
5204@end smallexample
5205
5206This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5207version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5208The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5209a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5210of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5211symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5212is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5213in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5214However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5215name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5216
5217Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5218depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5219to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5220
5221Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5222depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5223and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5224
5225When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5226specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5227unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5228unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5229somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5230wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5231wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5232set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5233ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5234
5235The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5236they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5237could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5238However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5239
0f6bf451 5240Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5241in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5242symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5243won't.
5244
5245@smallexample
7c9c73be 5246@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5247@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5248
252b5132
RH
5249When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5250symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5251requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5252shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5253loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5254linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5255application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5256way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5257all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5258search for each symbol reference.
5259
5260The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5261doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5262that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5263functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5264the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5265required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5266that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5267versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5268the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5269
5270There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5271first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5272source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5273script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5274maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5275@smallexample
5276__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5277@end smallexample
5278@noindent
5279in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5280be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5281The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5282@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5283takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5284
5285The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5286function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5287an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5288version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5289linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5290
5291To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5292source file. Here is an example:
5293
5294@smallexample
5295__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5296__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5297__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5298__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5299@end smallexample
5300
5301In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5302unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5303example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5304@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5305
5306When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5307some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5308this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5309@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5310declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5311you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5312
5313If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5314within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5315(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5316specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5317
cb840a31
L
5318You can also specify the language in the version script:
5319
5320@smallexample
5321VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5322@end smallexample
5323
c0065db7 5324The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5325The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5326demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5327patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5328@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5329
86043bbb
MM
5330Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5331described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5332or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5333the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5334whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5335cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5336might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5337should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5338expect when you upgrade.
5339
252b5132
RH
5340@node Expressions
5341@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5342@cindex expressions
5343@cindex arithmetic
5344The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5345that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5346expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5347host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5348
5349You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5350
5351The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5352expressions.
5353
5354@menu
5355* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5356* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5357* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5358* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5359* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5360* Operators:: Operators
5361* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5362* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5363* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5364@end menu
5365
5366@node Constants
5367@subsection Constants
5368@cindex integer notation
5369@cindex constants in linker scripts
5370All constants are integers.
5371
5372As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5373octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5374hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5375@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5376@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5377value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5378
5379@cindex scaled integers
5380@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5381@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5382@cindex suffixes for integers
5383@cindex integer suffixes
5384In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5385constant by
5386@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5387@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5388@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5389@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5390@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5391@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5392@tex
5393${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5394@end tex
5395@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5396respectively. For example, the following
5397all refer to the same quantity:
5398
252b5132 5399@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5400_fourk_1 = 4K;
5401_fourk_2 = 4096;
5402_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5403_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5404@end smallexample
5405
8a308ae8
NC
5406Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5407conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5408
0c71d759
NC
5409@node Symbolic Constants
5410@subsection Symbolic Constants
5411@cindex symbolic constants
5412@kindex CONSTANT
5413It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5414the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5415
5416@table @code
5417@item MAXPAGESIZE
5418@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5419The target's maximum page size.
5420
5421@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5422@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5423The target's default page size.
5424@end table
5425
5426So for example:
5427
5428@smallexample
9d5777a3 5429 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5430@end smallexample
5431
5432will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5433supported by the target.
5434
252b5132
RH
5435@node Symbols
5436@subsection Symbol Names
5437@cindex symbol names
5438@cindex names
5439@cindex quoted symbol names
5440@kindex "
5441Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5442and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5443Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5444specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5445keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5446@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5447"SECTION" = 9;
5448"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5449@end smallexample
5450
5451Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5452to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5453whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5454
ecca9871
L
5455@node Orphan Sections
5456@subsection Orphan Sections
5457@cindex orphan
5458Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5459are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5460script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5461output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5462placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5463attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5464same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5465If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5466at the end of the file.
5467
5468For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5469well as section flag.
5470
41911f68 5471If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5472the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5473__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5474section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5475orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5476representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5477character.
5478
252b5132
RH
5479@node Location Counter
5480@subsection The Location Counter
5481@kindex .
5482@cindex dot
5483@cindex location counter
5484@cindex current output location
5485The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5486current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5487location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5488within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5489anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5490
5491@cindex holes
5492Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5493moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5494location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5495and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5496doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5497
5498@smallexample
5499SECTIONS
5500@{
5501 output :
5502 @{
5503 file1(.text)
5504 . = . + 1000;
5505 file2(.text)
5506 . += 1000;
5507 file3(.text)
563e308f 5508 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5509@}
5510@end smallexample
5511@noindent
5512In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5513located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5514followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5515@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5516@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5517specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5518
5c6bbab8
NC
5519@cindex dot inside sections
5520Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5521current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5522statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5523absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5524however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5525not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5526
5527@smallexample
5528SECTIONS
5529@{
5530 . = 0x100
5531 .text: @{
5532 *(.text)
5533 . = 0x200
5534 @}
5535 . = 0x500
5536 .data: @{
5537 *(.data)
5538 . += 0x600
5539 @}
5540@}
5541@end smallexample
5542
5543The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5544and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5545the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5546much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5547move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5548and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5549the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5550the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5551
b5666f2f
AM
5552@cindex dot outside sections
5553Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5554output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5555needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5556
5557@smallexample
5558SECTIONS
5559@{
5560 start_of_text = . ;
5561 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5562 end_of_text = . ;
5563
5564 start_of_data = . ;
5565 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5566 end_of_data = . ;
5567@}
5568@end smallexample
5569
5570If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5571not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5572between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5573should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5574blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5575the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5576sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5577statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5578special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5579place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5580as follows:
5581
5582@smallexample
5583SECTIONS
5584@{
5585 start_of_text = . ;
5586 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5587 end_of_text = . ;
5588
5589 start_of_data = . ;
5590 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5591 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5592 end_of_data = . ;
5593@}
5594@end smallexample
5595
5596This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5597@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5598placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5599assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5600a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5601section. So you could write:
5602
5603@smallexample
5604SECTIONS
5605@{
5606 start_of_text = . ;
5607 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5608 end_of_text = . ;
5609
5610 . = . ;
5611 start_of_data = . ;
5612 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5613 end_of_data = . ;
5614@}
5615@end smallexample
5616
5617Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5618@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5619
252b5132
RH
5620@need 2000
5621@node Operators
5622@subsection Operators
5623@cindex operators for arithmetic
5624@cindex arithmetic operators
5625@cindex precedence in expressions
5626The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5627the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5628@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5629@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5630@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5631@smallexample
5632precedence associativity Operators Notes
5633(highest)
56341 left ! - ~ (1)
56352 left * / %
56363 left + -
56374 left >> <<
56385 left == != > < <= >=
56396 left &
56407 left |
56418 left &&
56429 left ||
564310 right ? :
564411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5645(lowest)
5646@end smallexample
5647Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5648(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5649(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5650@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5651@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5652@tex
5653\vskip \baselineskip
5654%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5655\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5656\hrule
5657\halign
5658{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5659height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5660&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5661height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5662\noalign{\hrule}
5663height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5664&highest&&&&&\cr
5665% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5666&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5667&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5668&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5669&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5670&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5671&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5672&7&&left&&|&\cr
5673&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5674&9&&left&&||&\cr
5675&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5676&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5677&lowest&&&&&\cr
5678height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5679\hrule}
5680@end tex
5681@iftex
5682{
5683@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5684@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5685@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5686}
5687@end iftex
5688@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5689
5690@node Evaluation
5691@subsection Evaluation
5692@cindex lazy evaluation
5693@cindex expression evaluation order
5694The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5695an expression when absolutely necessary.
5696
5697The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5698address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5699regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5700as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5701
5702However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5703until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5704other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5705for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5706
5707The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5708assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5709allocation.
5710
5711Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5712@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5713
5714If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5715available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5716following
5717@smallexample
5718@group
5719SECTIONS
5720 @{
a1ab1d2a 5721 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5722 @{ *(.text) @}
5723 @}
5724@end group
5725@end smallexample
5726@noindent
5727will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5728address}.
5729
5730@node Expression Section
5731@subsection The Section of an Expression
5732@cindex expression sections
5733@cindex absolute expressions
5734@cindex relative expressions
5735@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5736@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5737@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5738Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5739relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5740using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5741value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5742symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5743operations.
5744
abf4be64
AM
5745Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5746section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5747address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5748@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5749functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5750One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5751(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5752differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5753versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5754section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5755Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5756absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5757given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5758everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5759
5760In the following simple example,
252b5132 5761
7542af2a
AM
5762@smallexample
5763@group
5764SECTIONS
5765 @{
5766 . = 0x100;
5767 __executable_start = 0x100;
5768 .data :
5769 @{
5770 . = 0x10;
5771 __data_start = 0x10;
5772 *(.data)
5773 @}
5774 @dots{}
5775 @}
5776@end group
5777@end smallexample
252b5132 5778
7542af2a
AM
5779both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5780address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5781@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5782section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5783
5c3049d2
AM
5784For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5785addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5786
5787@itemize @bullet
5788@item
c05f749e
AM
5789Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5790operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5791absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5792@item
7542af2a
AM
5793Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5794relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5795and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5796@item
c05f749e
AM
5797Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5798in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5799address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5800before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5801@end itemize
5802
5803The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5804
5805@itemize @bullet
5806@item
5807An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5808@item
5809The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5810@item
9bc8bb33 5811The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5812relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5813(after above conversions) is also a number.
5814@item
5815The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5816relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5817section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5818@item
5819The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5820conversions) is an absolute address.
5821@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5822
5823You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5824to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5825create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5826section @samp{.data}:
5827@smallexample
5828SECTIONS
5829 @{
5830 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5831 @}
5832@end smallexample
5833@noindent
5834If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5835@samp{.data} section.
5836
7542af2a
AM
5837Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5838particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5839
252b5132
RH
5840@node Builtin Functions
5841@subsection Builtin Functions
5842@cindex functions in expressions
5843The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5844use in linker script expressions.
5845
5846@table @code
5847@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5848@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5849@cindex expression, absolute
5850Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5851of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5852value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5853normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5854
5855@item ADDR(@var{section})
5856@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5857@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5858Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5859script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5860the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5861@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5862@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5863the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5864@smallexample
5865@group
5866SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5867 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5868 @{
252b5132
RH
5869 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5870 @dots{}
5871 @}
5872 .output :
5873 @{
5874 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5875 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5876 @}
5877@dots{} @}
5878@end group
5879@end smallexample
5880
876f4090
NS
5881@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5882@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5883@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5884@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5885@cindex round up location counter
5886@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5887@cindex round up expression
5888@cindex align expression
5889Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5890to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5891doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5892arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5893expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5894equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5895
5896Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5897next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5898variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5899input sections:
252b5132
RH
5900@smallexample
5901@group
5902SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5903 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5904 *(.data)
5905 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5906 @}
5907@dots{} @}
5908@end group
5909@end smallexample
5910@noindent
5911The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5912a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5913a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5914of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5915
5916The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5917
362c1d1a
NS
5918@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5919@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5920@cindex section alignment
5921Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5922been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5923evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5924the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5925value in that section.
5926@smallexample
5927@group
5928SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5929 .output @{
5930 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5931 @dots{}
5932 @}
5933@dots{} @}
5934@end group
5935@end smallexample
5936
252b5132
RH
5937@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5938@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5939This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5940scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5941section.
5942
2d20f7bf
JJ
5943@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5944@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5945This is equivalent to either
5946@smallexample
5947(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5948@end smallexample
5949or
5950@smallexample
5951(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5952@end smallexample
5953@noindent
5954depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5955for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5956@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5957If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5958memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5959bytes in the on-disk file.
5960
5961This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5962any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5963@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5964be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5965working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5966
5967@noindent
5968Example:
5969@smallexample
5970 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5971@end smallexample
5972
5973@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5974@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5975This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5976evaluation purposes.
5977
5978@smallexample
5979 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5980@end smallexample
5981
a4f5ad88
JJ
5982@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5983@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5984This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5985@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5986When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5987does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5988@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5989boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5990it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5991@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5992padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5993section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5994
5995@smallexample
5996 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5997@end smallexample
5998
252b5132
RH
5999@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6000@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6001@cindex symbol defaults
6002Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6003defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6004return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6005default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6006shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6007the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6008existed, its value is preserved:
6009
6010@smallexample
6011@group
6012SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6013 .text : @{
6014 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6015 @dots{}
6016 @}
6017 @dots{}
6018@}
6019@end group
6020@end smallexample
6021
3ec57632
NC
6022@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6023@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6024Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6025
252b5132
RH
6026@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6027@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6028@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6029Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6030Section LMA}).
6031
2e53f7d6
NC
6032@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6033@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6034Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6035@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6036
252b5132
RH
6037@kindex MAX
6038@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6039Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6040
6041@kindex MIN
6042@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6043Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6044
6045@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6046@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6047@cindex unallocated address, next
6048Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6049This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6050use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6051output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6052
3ec57632
NC
6053@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6054@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6055Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6056
ba916c8a
MM
6057@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6058@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6059Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6060value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6061@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6062will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6063can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6064``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6065name.
6066
252b5132
RH
6067@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6068@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6069@cindex section size
6070Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6071been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6072evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6073@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6074@smallexample
6075@group
6076SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6077 .output @{
6078 .start = . ;
6079 @dots{}
6080 .end = . ;
6081 @}
6082 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6083 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6084@dots{} @}
6085@end group
6086@end smallexample
6087
6088@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6089@itemx sizeof_headers
6090@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6091@cindex header size
6092Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6093information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6094this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6095choose, to facilitate paging.
6096
6097@cindex not enough room for program headers
6098@cindex program headers, not enough room
6099When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6100@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6101number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6102addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6103additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6104room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6105the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6106script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6107you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6108command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6109@end table
6110
6111@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6112@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6113@cindex implicit linker scripts
6114If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6115an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6116linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6117linker will report an error.
6118
6119An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6120
6121Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6122assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6123commands.
6124
6125Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6126at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6127read. This can affect archive searching.
6128
6129@ifset GENERIC
6130@node Machine Dependent
6131@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6132
6133@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6134@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6135sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6136functionality are not listed.
6137
6138@menu
36f63dca
NC
6139@ifset H8300
6140* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6141@end ifset
6142@ifset I960
6143* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6144@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6145@ifset M68HC11
6146* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6147@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6148@ifset ARM
6149* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6150@end ifset
6151@ifset HPPA
6152* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6153@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6154@ifset M68K
6155* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6156@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6157@ifset MIPS
6158* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6159@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6160@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6161* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6162@end ifset
2469cfa2 6163@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6164* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6165@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6166@ifset NDS32
6167* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6168@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6169@ifset NIOSII
6170* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6171@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6172@ifset POWERPC
6173* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6174@end ifset
6175@ifset POWERPC64
6176* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6177@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6178@ifset SPU
6179* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6180@end ifset
74459f0e 6181@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6182* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6183@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6184@ifset WIN32
6185* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6186@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6187@ifset XTENSA
6188* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6189@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6190@end menu
6191@end ifset
6192
252b5132
RH
6193@ifset H8300
6194@ifclear GENERIC
6195@raisesections
6196@end ifclear
6197
6198@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6199@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6200
6201@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6202For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6203you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6204
6205@table @emph
6206@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6207@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6208@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6209targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6210program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6211respectively.
6212
6213@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6214@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6215@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6216@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6217sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6218page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6219(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6220@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6221top page of memory).
1502569c 6222
81f5558e
NC
6223@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6224indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6225displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6226the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6227@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6228whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6229range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6230
1502569c 6231@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6232@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6233biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6234which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6235page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6236(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6237@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6238the top page of memory).
6239
6240@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6241@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
624232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6243changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6244(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6245@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6246the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6247@end table
6248
6249@ifclear GENERIC
6250@lowersections
6251@end ifclear
6252@end ifset
6253
36f63dca 6254@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6255@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6256@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6257@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6258@node Renesas
6259@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6260
c2dcd04e
NC
6261@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6262H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6263options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6264@end ifset
6265@end ifclear
6266
6267@ifset I960
6268@ifclear GENERIC
6269@raisesections
6270@end ifclear
6271
6272@node i960
6273@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6274
6275@cindex i960 support
6276
6277You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6278specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6279family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6280incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6281linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6282libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6283search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6284
6285For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6286well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6287paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6288the names
6289
6290@smallexample
6291@group
6292try
6293libtry.a
6294tryca
6295libtryca.a
6296@end group
6297@end smallexample
6298
6299@noindent
6300The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6301two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6302
6303You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6304the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6305use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6306specifies a library.
6307
6308@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6309@cindex relaxing on i960
6310@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6311you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6312@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6313them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6314instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6315instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6316target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6317not itself call any subroutines).
6318
6319@ifclear GENERIC
6320@lowersections
6321@end ifclear
6322@end ifset
6323
6324@ifset ARM
6325@ifclear GENERIC
6326@raisesections
6327@end ifclear
6328
93fd0973
SC
6329@ifset M68HC11
6330@ifclear GENERIC
6331@raisesections
6332@end ifclear
6333
6334@node M68HC11/68HC12
6335@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6336
6337@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6338
6339@subsection Linker Relaxation
6340
6341For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6342optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6343
6344@table @emph
6345@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6346@item relaxing address modes
6347@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6348targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6349program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6350respectively.
6351
6352@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6353transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6354page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6355
6356@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6357When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6358of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6359addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6360@code{bset} instructions.
6361
6362@end table
6363
6364@subsection Trampoline Generation
6365
6366@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6367@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6368For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6369call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6370will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6371trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6372case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6373point to the function trampoline.
6374
6375@ifclear GENERIC
6376@lowersections
6377@end ifclear
6378@end ifset
6379
36f63dca 6380@node ARM
3674e28a 6381@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6382
6383@cindex ARM interworking support
6384@kindex --support-old-code
6385For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6386between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6387been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6388line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6389libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6390option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6391given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6392which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6393the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6394non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6395
6396@cindex thumb entry point
6397@cindex entry point, thumb
6398@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6399The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6400@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6401But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6402branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6403executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6404
ce11ba6c
KT
6405@cindex PE import table prefixing
6406@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6407The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6408the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6409element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6410import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6411
e489d0ae
PB
6412@cindex BE8
6413@kindex --be8
6414The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6415executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6416The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6417
3674e28a
PB
6418@cindex TARGET1
6419@kindex --target1-rel
6420@kindex --target1-abs
6421The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6422@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6423or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6424and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6425
6426@cindex TARGET2
6427@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6428The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6429@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6430meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6431@table @samp
6432@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6433@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6434@item abs
6435@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6436@item got-rel
6437@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6438@end table
6439
319850b4
JB
6440@cindex FIX_V4BX
6441@kindex --fix-v4bx
6442The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6443specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6444interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6445also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6446
6447In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6448linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6449@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6450
6451In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6452relocations are ignored.
6453
845b51d6
PB
6454@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6455@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6456Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6457relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6458
6459@smallexample
6460TST rM, #1
6461MOVEQ PC, rM
6462BX Rn
6463@end smallexample
6464
6465This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6466and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6467condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6468
33bfe774
JB
6469@cindex USE_BLX
6470@kindex --use-blx
6471The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6472BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6473situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6474code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6475each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6476
6477This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6478specify it if you are using that target.
6479
c6dd86c6
JB
6480@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6481@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6482The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6483bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6484instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6485to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6486the support code can read the intended values.
6487
6488The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6489intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6490and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6491intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6492full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6493you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6494
6495If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6496enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6497@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6498mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6499vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6500@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6501
6502If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6503potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6504such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6505first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6506instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6507the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6508are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6509
2de70689
MGD
6510@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6511@kindex --fix-arm1176
6512@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6513The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6514in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6515are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6516unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6517
9d5777a3 6518Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6519Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6520http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6521
bf21ed78
MS
6522@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6523@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6524The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6525warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6526enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6527linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6528using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6529not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6530
6531@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6532@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6533The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6534warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6535@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6536linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6537using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6538
726150b7
NC
6539@cindex PIC_VENEER
6540@kindex --pic-veneer
6541The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6542ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6543is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6544@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6545
6546@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6547@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6548The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6549code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6550perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6551placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6552controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6553The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6554duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6555group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6556code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6557where they should be placed.
6558
6559The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6560@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6561placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6562branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6563placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6564value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6565exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6566A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6567linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6568from the input sections.
6569
6570The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6571@samp{N = +1}.
6572
1a51c1a4
NC
6573Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6574only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6575otherwise.
6576
1db37fe6
YG
6577@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6578@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6579@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6580The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6581
6582The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6583
68fcca92
JW
6584@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6585@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6586@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6587The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6588
6589Please contact ARM for further details.
6590
1db37fe6
YG
6591@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6592@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6593@cindex Merging exidx entries
6594The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6595
6596@kindex --long-plt
6597@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6598The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6599which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6600entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6601
36f63dca
NC
6602@ifclear GENERIC
6603@lowersections
6604@end ifclear
6605@end ifset
6606
6607@ifset HPPA
6608@ifclear GENERIC
6609@raisesections
6610@end ifclear
6611
6612@node HPPA ELF32
6613@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6614@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6615@kindex --multi-subspace
6616When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6617import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6618The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6619stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6620multiple sub-spaces.
6621
6622@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6623@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6624Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6625stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6626@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6627sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6628a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6629the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6630conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6631prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6632A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6633branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6634@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6635@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6636detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6637positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6638
6639Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6640single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6641create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6642large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6643
6644@ifclear GENERIC
6645@lowersections
6646@end ifclear
6647@end ifset
6648
7fb9f789
NC
6649@ifset M68K
6650@ifclear GENERIC
6651@raisesections
6652@end ifclear
6653
6654@node M68K
6655@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6656
6657@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6658@kindex --got=@var{type}
6659The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6660The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6661@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6662the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6663@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6664entries only at non-negative offsets.
6665@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6666entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6667support such GOTs.
6668@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6669output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6670file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6671files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6672
6673@ifclear GENERIC
6674@lowersections
6675@end ifclear
6676@end ifset
6677
833794fc
MR
6678@ifset MIPS
6679@ifclear GENERIC
6680@raisesections
6681@end ifclear
6682
6683@node MIPS
6684@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6685
6686@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6687@kindex --insn32
6688@kindex --no-insn32
6689The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6690microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6691in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6692used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6693or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6694including 16-bit ones where possible.
6695
6696@ifclear GENERIC
6697@lowersections
6698@end ifclear
6699@end ifset
6700
36f63dca
NC
6701@ifset MMIX
6702@ifclear GENERIC
6703@raisesections
6704@end ifclear
6705
6706@node MMIX
6707@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6708For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6709@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6710understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6711can translate between the two formats.
6712
6713There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6714Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6715registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6716equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6717@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6718global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6719this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6720symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6721
7a2de473
HPN
6722Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6723@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6724The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6725of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6726
6727Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6728are left out from an mmo file.
6729
6730@ifclear GENERIC
6731@lowersections
6732@end ifclear
6733@end ifset
6734
6735@ifset MSP430
6736@ifclear GENERIC
6737@raisesections
6738@end ifclear
6739
6740@node MSP430
6741@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6742For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6743will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6744just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6745
6746@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6747The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6748
6749@table @code
6750@item @samp{.vectors}
6751Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6752
6753@item @samp{.bootloader}
6754Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6755in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6756
6757@item @samp{.infomem}
6758Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6759this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6760
c0065db7 6761@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6762This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6763in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6764
6765@item @samp{.noinit}
6766Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6767
c0065db7 6768The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6769@end table
6770
6771@ifclear GENERIC
6772@lowersections
6773@end ifclear
6774@end ifset
6775
35c08157
KLC
6776@ifset NDS32
6777@ifclear GENERIC
6778@raisesections
6779@end ifclear
6780
6781@node NDS32
6782@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6783@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6784For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6785relaxes objects according to these options.
6786
6787@table @code
6788@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6789Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6790
6791@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6792Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6793
6794@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6795Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6796
6797@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6798Export the EX9 table after linking.
6799
6800@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6801Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6802
6803@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6804Update the existing EX9 table.
6805
6806@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6807Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6808
6809@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6810Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6811
6812@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6813Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6814
6815@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6816Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6817@end table
6818
6819@ifclear GENERIC
6820@lowersections
6821@end ifclear
6822@end ifset
6823
78058a5e
SL
6824@ifset NIOSII
6825@ifclear GENERIC
6826@raisesections
6827@end ifclear
6828
6829@node Nios II
6830@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6831@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6832@kindex --relax on Nios II
6833
6834Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6835transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6836which may result in @command{ld} giving
6837@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6838The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6839trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6840outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6841trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6842be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6843larger than 256MB.
6844
6845The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6846is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6847@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6848locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6849source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6850register as a temporary.
6851
6852Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6853relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6854option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6855
6856@ifclear GENERIC
6857@lowersections
6858@end ifclear
6859@end ifset
6860
2a60a7a8
AM
6861@ifset POWERPC
6862@ifclear GENERIC
6863@raisesections
6864@end ifclear
6865
6866@node PowerPC ELF32
6867@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6868@cindex PowerPC long branches
6869@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6870Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6871displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6872@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6873@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6874the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6875section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6876section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6877@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6878both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6879considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6880
6881@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6882@table @option
6883@cindex PowerPC PLT
6884@kindex --bss-plt
6885@item --bss-plt
6886Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6887generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6888the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6889writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6890@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6891PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6892compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6893BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6894
016687f8
AM
6895@kindex --secure-plt
6896@item --secure-plt
6897@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6898@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6899when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6900layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6901style BSS PLT.
6902
2a60a7a8
AM
6903@cindex PowerPC GOT
6904@kindex --sdata-got
6905@item --sdata-got
6906The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6907sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6908@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6909section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6910@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6911@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6912@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6913@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6914PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6915pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6916GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6917really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6918
6919@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6920@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6921@item --emit-stub-syms
6922This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6923symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6924
6925@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6926@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6927@item --no-tls-optimize
6928PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6929sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6930disable the optimization.
6931@end table
6932
6933@ifclear GENERIC
6934@lowersections
6935@end ifclear
6936@end ifset
6937
6938@ifset POWERPC64
6939@ifclear GENERIC
6940@raisesections
6941@end ifclear
6942
6943@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6944@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6945
6946@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6947@table @option
6948@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6949@kindex --stub-group-size
6950@item --stub-group-size
6951Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6952by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6953@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6954sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6955a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6956the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6957conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6958prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6959A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6960branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6961@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6962@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6963detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6964positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6965
6966Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6967single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6968create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6969large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6970
6971@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6972@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6973@item --emit-stub-syms
6974This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6975symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6976
6977@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6978@kindex --dotsyms
6979@kindex --no-dotsyms
6980@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6981These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6982in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6983function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6984code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6985properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6986to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6987@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6988dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6989feature.
6990
6991@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6992@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6993@item --no-tls-optimize
6994PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6995sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6996disable the optimization.
6997
6998@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6999@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7000@item --no-opd-optimize
7001PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7002corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7003the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7004Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7005
7006@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7007@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7008@item --non-overlapping-opd
7009Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7010@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7011the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7012entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7013
7014@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7015@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7016@item --no-toc-optimize
7017PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7018entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7019reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7020marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7021marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7022relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7023unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7024reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7025discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7026reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7027code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7028optimization.
7029
7030@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7031@kindex --no-multi-toc
7032@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7033If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7034@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7035where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7036entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7037total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7038grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7039TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7040calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7041help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
704264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7043Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7044
7045@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7046@kindex --no-toc-sort
7047@item --no-toc-sort
7048By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7049happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7050placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7051with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7052referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7053@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7054results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7055off this feature.
7056
7057@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7058@kindex --plt-align
7059@kindex --no-plt-align
7060@item --plt-align
7061@itemx --no-plt-align
7062Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7063padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7064specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7065that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7066stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7067
7068@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7069@kindex --plt-static-chain
7070@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7071@item --plt-static-chain
7072@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7073Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7074chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7075chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7076
7077@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7078@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7079@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7080@item --plt-thread-safe
7081@itemx --no-thread-safe
7082With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7083lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7084another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7085order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7086memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7087barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7088looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7089seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7090default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7091@end table
7092
7093@ifclear GENERIC
7094@lowersections
7095@end ifclear
7096@end ifset
7097
49fa1e15
AM
7098@ifset SPU
7099@ifclear GENERIC
7100@raisesections
7101@end ifclear
7102
7103@node SPU ELF
7104@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7105
7106@cindex SPU ELF options
7107@table @option
7108
7109@cindex SPU plugins
7110@kindex --plugin
7111@item --plugin
7112This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7113
7114@cindex SPU overlays
7115@kindex --no-overlays
7116@item --no-overlays
7117Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7118regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7119@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7120turns off all this special overlay handling.
7121
7122@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7123@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7124@item --emit-stub-syms
7125This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7126symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7127
7128@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7129@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7130@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7131This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7132function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7133on calls to non-overlay regions.
7134
7135@cindex SPU local store size
7136@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7137@item --local-store=lo:hi
7138@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7139the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7140range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7141
c0065db7 7142@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7143@kindex --stack-analysis
7144@item --stack-analysis
7145SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7146unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7147under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7148@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7149@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7150determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7151for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7152for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7153for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7154find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7155and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7156under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7157dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7158is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7159and calls will be given.
7160
c0065db7 7161@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7162@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7163@item --emit-stack-syms
7164This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7165in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7166These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7167functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7168functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7169such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7170The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7171@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7172@end table
7173
7174@ifclear GENERIC
7175@lowersections
7176@end ifclear
7177@end ifset
7178
36f63dca
NC
7179@ifset TICOFF
7180@ifclear GENERIC
7181@raisesections
7182@end ifclear
7183
7184@node TI COFF
7185@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7186@cindex TI COFF versions
7187@kindex --format=@var{version}
7188The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7189TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7190also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7191format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7192header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7193
7194@ifclear GENERIC
7195@lowersections
7196@end ifclear
7197@end ifset
7198
2ca22b03
NC
7199@ifset WIN32
7200@ifclear GENERIC
7201@raisesections
7202@end ifclear
7203
7204@node WIN32
7205@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7206
c0065db7 7207This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7208See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7209command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7210
7211@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7212@cindex import libraries
7213@item import libraries
69da35b5 7214The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7215libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7216regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7217archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7218support for creating such libraries provided with the
7219@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7220
c0065db7
RM
7221@item exporting DLL symbols
7222@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7223The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7224
7225@table @emph
7226@item using auto-export functionality
7227@cindex using auto-export functionality
7228By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7229which is controlled by the following command line options:
7230
0a5d968e
NC
7231@itemize
7232@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7233@item --exclude-symbols
7234@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7235@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7236@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7237@end itemize
7238
09e2aba4
DK
7239When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7240(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7241symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7242often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7243private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7244options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7245exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7246final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7247
7248If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7249command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7250if either of the following are true:
7251
7252@itemize
7253@item A DEF file is used.
7254@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7255@end itemize
dc8465bf 7256
c0065db7
RM
7257@item using a DEF file
7258@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7259Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7260an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7261exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7262name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7263command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7264
7265@example
7266gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7267@end example
7268
0a5d968e
NC
7269Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7270@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7271
dc8465bf
NC
7272Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7273
7274@example
4b5bd4e7 7275LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7276
7277EXPORTS
7278foo
7279bar
7280_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7281another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7282var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7283doo = foo == foo2
7284eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7285@end example
dc8465bf 7286
7fcab871 7287This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7288symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7289alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7290by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7291@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7292@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7293export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7294in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7295symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7296
6b31ad16
DS
7297The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7298name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7299the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7300
b45619c0
NC
7301When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7302library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7303@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7304executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7305
7306With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7307specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7308non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7309
7310If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7311or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7312filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7313
4b5bd4e7
DS
7314The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7315
7316@example
7317EXPORTS
7318 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7319 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7320 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7321@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7322
7323Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7324@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7325@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7326@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7327Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7328@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7329string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7330
7331The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7332
7333@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7334will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7335by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7336linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7337library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7338
7339@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7340The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7341the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7342@code{*_imp__foo}).
7343
7344@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7345well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7346read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7347variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7348the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7349extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7350application will behave unexpectedly.
7351
7352@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7353it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7354symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7355API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7356the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7357
4b5bd4e7
DS
7358See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7359other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7360
7361@cindex creating a DEF file
7362While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7363with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7364
7365@item Using decorations
7366@cindex Using decorations
7367Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7368itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7369declared as:
7370
7371@example
7372__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7373__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7374@end example
7375
7376All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7377any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7378this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7379the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7380
7381Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7382decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7383instead:
7384
7385@example
7386__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7387__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7388@end example
7389
c0065db7
RM
7390This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7391when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7392variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7393code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7394of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7395omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7396@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7397information.
c0065db7 7398@end table
dc8465bf 7399
2ca22b03
NC
7400@cindex automatic data imports
7401@item automatic data imports
7402The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7403by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7404compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7405issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7406code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7407c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7408initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7409decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7410platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7411command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7412The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7413suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7414trigger the feature's use.
7415
c0065db7 7416auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7417additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7418
c0065db7 7419"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7420documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7421
c0065db7
RM
7422The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7423occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7424One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7425below.
7426
7427@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7428For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7429object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7430offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7431field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7432in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7433without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7434The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7435references.
7436
c0065db7
RM
7437The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7438be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7439themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7440runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7441compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7442support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7443run without error on an older system.
7444
c0065db7
RM
7445@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7446enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7447
7448@cindex direct linking to a dll
7449@item direct linking to a dll
7450The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7451including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7452libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7453traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7454libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7455function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7456though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7457storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7458tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7459large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7460
c0065db7 7461Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7462@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7463of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7464perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7465select the dll instead of an import library.
7466
2ca22b03 7467
69da35b5
NC
7468For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7469to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7470
7471@example
45e948fe
NC
7472libxxx.dll.a
7473xxx.dll.a
7474libxxx.a
7475xxx.lib
69da35b5 7476cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7477libxxx.dll
7478xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7479@end example
7480
69da35b5
NC
7481before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7482
c0065db7
RM
7483(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7484where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7485@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7486file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7487@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7488
c0065db7
RM
7489Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7490@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7491was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7492various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7493could coexist on the same machine.
7494
2ca22b03
NC
7495The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7496applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7497libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7498
7499@example
7500bin/
7501 cygxxx.dll
7502lib/
7503 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7504 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7505@end example
7506
c0065db7
RM
7507Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7508done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7509
75101. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7511@example
7512gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7513@end example
2ca22b03 7514
69da35b5
NC
7515However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7516(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7517@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7518not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7519
2ca22b03
NC
75202. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7521directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7522should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7523making the app/dll.
7524
7525@example
7526ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7527@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7528
7529Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7530
7531@example
7532gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7533@end example
69da35b5
NC
7534
7535This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7536perfectly legal
7537
7538@example
7539bin/
7540 cygxxx-5.dll
7541lib/
c0065db7 7542 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7543@end example
7544
dc8465bf 7545Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7546even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7547@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7548
7549Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7550wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7551
75521. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7553work with auto-imported data.
7554
dc8465bf
NC
75552. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7556import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7557symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7558for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7559possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7560
45e948fe
NC
75613. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7562critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7563in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7564stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7565
69da35b5 7566So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7567true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7568a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7569binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7570massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7571requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7572will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7573
c0065db7 7574@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7575@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7576@item adding additional names
7577Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7578A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7579exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7580when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7581import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7582
c0065db7 7583@example
dc8465bf
NC
7584LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7585
7586EXPORTS
c0065db7 7587foo
dc8465bf 7588_foo = foo
c0065db7 7589@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7590
7591The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7592
7593Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7594source code using the "weak" attribute:
7595
c0065db7
RM
7596@example
7597void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7598void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7599@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7600
7601See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7602symbols.
7603
7604@item renaming symbols
7605Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7606kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7607@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7608DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7609created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7610
c0065db7 7611@example
dc8465bf
NC
7612LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7613
7614EXPORTS
7615_foo = foo
c0065db7 7616@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7617
7618The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7619@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7620@end table
dc8465bf 7621
0a5d968e 7622Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7623unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7624If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7625@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7626that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7627@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7628renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7629to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7630the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7631In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7632which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7633
7634@cindex weak externals
7635@item weak externals
7636The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7637weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7638defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7639are three variants of weak externals:
7640@itemize
7641@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7642called lazy externals.
7643@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7644This form is not presently implemented.
7645@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7646implemented.
7647@end itemize
7648As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7649are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7650uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7651
7652@cindex aligned common symbols
7653@item aligned common symbols
7654As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7655desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7656the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7657carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7658by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7659tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7660but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7661warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7662
2ca22b03
NC
7663@end table
7664
7665@ifclear GENERIC
7666@lowersections
7667@end ifclear
7668@end ifset
7669
e0001a05
NC
7670@ifset XTENSA
7671@ifclear GENERIC
7672@raisesections
7673@end ifclear
7674
7675@node Xtensa
7676@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7677
7678@cindex Xtensa processors
7679The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7680@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7681specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7682keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7683example, with the command:
7684
7685@smallexample
7686SECTIONS
7687@{
7688 .text : @{
7689 *(.literal .text)
7690 @}
7691@}
7692@end smallexample
7693
7694@noindent
7695@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7696and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7697literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7698interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7699group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7700files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7701and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7702
43cd72b9 7703@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7704@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7705Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7706provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7707is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7708literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7709will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7710location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7711the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7712unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7713@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7714range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7715
7716For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7717to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7718instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7719instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7720instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7721@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7722hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7723By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7724switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7725density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7726instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7727performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7728linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7729a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7730
7731The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7732control the linker:
7733
7734@cindex Xtensa options
7735@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7736@item --size-opt
7737When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7738more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7739no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7740alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7741preserve the correctness of the code.
7742@end table
e0001a05
NC
7743
7744@ifclear GENERIC
7745@lowersections
7746@end ifclear
7747@end ifset
7748
252b5132
RH
7749@ifclear SingleFormat
7750@node BFD
7751@chapter BFD
7752
7753@cindex back end
7754@cindex object file management
7755@cindex object formats available
7756@kindex objdump -i
7757The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7758These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7759object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7760format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7761it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7762associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7763object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7764(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7765list all the formats available for your configuration.
7766
7767@cindex BFD requirements
7768@cindex requirements for BFD
7769As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7770several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7771BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7772formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7773been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7774BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7775may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7776
7777One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7778mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7779useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7780conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7781
7782@menu
7783* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7784@end menu
7785
7786@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7787@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7788@cindex opening object files
7789@include bfdsumm.texi
7790@end ifclear
7791
7792@node Reporting Bugs
7793@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7794@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7795@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7796
ff5dcc92 7797Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7798
7799Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7800it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7801to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7802work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7803@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7804
7805In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7806information that enables us to fix the bug.
7807
7808@menu
7809* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7810* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7811@end menu
7812
7813@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7814@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7815@cindex bug criteria
7816
7817If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7818
7819@itemize @bullet
7820@cindex fatal signal
7821@cindex linker crash
7822@cindex crash of linker
7823@item
7824If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7825@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7826
7827@cindex error on valid input
7828@item
ff5dcc92 7829If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7830
7831@cindex invalid input
7832@item
ff5dcc92 7833If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7834may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7835object files are correct.
7836
7837@item
7838If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7839improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7840@end itemize
7841
7842@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7843@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7844@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7845@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7846
7847A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7848products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7849recommend you contact that organization first.
7850
7851You can find contact information for many support companies and
7852individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7853distribution.
7854
ad22bfe8 7855@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7856Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7857@value{BUGURL}.
7858@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7859
7860The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7861@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7862fact or leave it out, state it!
7863
7864Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7865problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7866assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7867matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7868the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7869location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7870were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7871into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7872specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7873and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7874
7875Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7876the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7877on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7878
7879Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7880bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7881respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7882You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7883
7884To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7885
7886@itemize @bullet
7887@item
ff5dcc92 7888The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7889the @samp{--version} argument.
7890
7891Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7892the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7893
7894@item
ff5dcc92 7895Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7896patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7897
7898@item
7899The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7900version number.
7901
7902@item
ff5dcc92 7903What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7904``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7905
7906@item
7907The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7908observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7909list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7910sufficient.
7911
7912If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7913and then we might not encounter the bug.
7914
7915@item
7916A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7917bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7918provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7919bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7920state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7921requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7922we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7923attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7924
7925If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7926@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7927object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7928@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7929how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7930
7931@item
7932A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7933incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7934
ff5dcc92 7935Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7936will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7937not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7938a chance to make a mistake.
7939
7940Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7941say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7942copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7943C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7944and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7945fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7946you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7947any conclusion from our observations.
7948
7949@item
ff5dcc92 7950If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7951diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7952@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7953If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7954context, not by line number.
7955
7956The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7957sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7958@end itemize
7959
7960Here are some things that are not necessary:
7961
7962@itemize @bullet
7963@item
7964A description of the envelope of the bug.
7965
7966Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7967which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7968changes will not affect it.
7969
7970This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7971will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7972with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7973We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7974
7975Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7976of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7977output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7978less time, and so on.
7979
7980However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7981report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7982
7983@item
7984A patch for the bug.
7985
7986A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7987the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7988a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7989to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7990
ff5dcc92 7991Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7992construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7993through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7994able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7995fixed.
7996
7997And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7998patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7999help us to understand.
8000
8001@item
8002A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8003
8004Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8005things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8006@end itemize
8007
8008@node MRI
8009@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8010@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8011To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8012linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8013alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8014described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8015simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8016@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8017linker commands; these commands are described here.
8018
8019In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8020file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8021features to make use of them.
8022
8023You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8024@samp{-c} command-line option.
8025
8026Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8027command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8028blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8029MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8030issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8031
8032Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8033
8034You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8035lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8036The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8037
8038@table @code
8039@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8040@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8041@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8042Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8043the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8044@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8045your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8046script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8047commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8048input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8049@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8050
8051@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8052@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8053Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8054in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8055
8056@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8057
8058@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8059@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8060Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8061@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8062
8063@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8064@item BASE @var{expression}
8065Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8066absolute addresses) in the output file.
8067
8068@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8069@item CHIP @var{expression}
8070@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8071This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8072
8073@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8074@item END
8075This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8076
8077@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8078@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8079Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8080language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8081
8082@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8083@item
252b5132
RH
8084S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8085
8086@item
8087IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8088
8089@item
8090COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8091@samp{COFF}
8092@end enumerate
8093
8094@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8095@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8096Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8097@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8098
8099The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8100same line, with no change in its effect.
8101
8102@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8103@item LOAD @var{filename}
8104@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8105Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8106same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8107command line.
8108
8109@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8110@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8111@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8112MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8113option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8114
8115@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8116@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8117@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8118Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8119order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8120script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8121sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8122file, in the order specified.
8123
8124@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8125@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8126@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8127@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8128Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8129@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8130
8131@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8132@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8133@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8134@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8135You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8136specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8137If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8138@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8139@end table
8140
793c5807
NC
8141@node GNU Free Documentation License
8142@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8143@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8144
370b66a1
CD
8145@node LD Index
8146@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8147
8148@printindex cp
8149
8150@tex
7ca01ed9 8151% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8152% meantime:
8153\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8154\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8155\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8156\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8157\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8158\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8159\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8160\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8161\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8162% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8163@end tex
8164
252b5132 8165@bye
This page took 1.183036 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.